Home
        TA520 Time Interval Analyzer User`s Manual
         Contents
1.                   Block Sample  prey faBlockSizde jResthode   ghestTime     a GateNode JfREventsizefea interval  4 iat falnterval fa OFF 16 Tine 1 6u5  Event ous   ooo T To    T   EAE E ICI    e When the pause mode is set to Event  6  Press the  RestEvent  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the number of events to pause     Y1   17 406ns YZ  32 6061    Lo GateMode fmEvents izde Interval fs eee mIn  rT JTL JL ILI L IL ae                              Block Sample  Mode eblocksizgehestHode   ghestEven  Ea   OFF DN  16 Event 1          IM 704310 01E 6 5       O   D     m    Q      gt   D   gt   O  2  S           O      O  O      Q      O           O     h  mp   gt   D     D      V  c     D  3  D     mmh  5       c  mp  o   Q           6 3 Performing Block Sampling    Explanation    The display format and analysis method of the block sampled data differ for the time   stamp mode and the hardware histogram mode    Time stamp mode   The instrument retains time stamps and measured values for each measurement block   You can display the time variation display  list display  and calculate statistics on each  measurement block     Hardware histogram mode   The instrument retains the measured values and the frequency of occurrence of those  values by summing the data of all measurement blocks  You can not use the list display  or calculate statistics on each measurement block     Setting the number of blocks  e Time stamp mode   1 to 100  e Hardware histogram mod
2.            Q  Rime  O            D  emp  D  Q  JJ  D  on        T  5     3  D  L  D     Q     D         T  m     O         9   3         Q  D    IM 704310 01E 8 7    8 4 Displaying the Panorama Display    8 8    Explanation    7  Press the  Area Min  soft key    Turn the rotary knob to set the value at the left end of the panorama display   8  Press the  Area Max  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the value at the right end of the panorama display     Setting the range to display zoomed  9  Press the  ZoomSpan  soft key  Turn the rotary knob to set the range of the zoom display  size of the zoom box      Moving the zoom position  10  Press the  Position  soft key  Turn the rotary knob to move the zoom box position     Setting the speed of movement of the zoom box  11  Pressing the  Movement  soft key and selecting    decreases the speed of  movement of the zoom box  Selecting  gt  increases the speed of movement     Moving the zoom position to the center  12  Pressing the  Adjust  soft key moves the zoom box to the center of the panorama  window        Movenent       a      fia coons  L 1 2us  gt  gt   Esci     rm hy i i    Panorama display   The data can be displayed in the panorama window at the top section of the histogram  display    In the panorama display  a maximum of 3 6 us of histogram can be listed and the  waveform in the zoom box can be displayed zoomed in the main window  The panorama  function is used when there are multiple histograms and you wish to look 
3.       Setup will be initialized       OK   Cancel             Canceling the initialization  3  An Alert   menu is displayed  Turning the rotary knob to select  Cancel  and  pressing the SELECT key cancels the initialization     13 1    suoljoun 193410 Buisp a    13 1 Initializing the Setup Information    Explanation    13 2    Initial settings    When the setup information is initialized  the parameters are reset to the following    settings     Item    MODE key  FUNCTION key  Function  Channel Slope    SAMPLE key  Gate Mode  Event Num  Gate Time  Gate Polarity  Sample Interval  Arming   Ext Arm Slope  Arming Delay  Delay Event  Delay Time  Block   Block Size  Rest Mode  Rest Event  Rest Time  Inhibit  Ref Clock    INPUT key   CHA and CHB   Impedance  Coupling  Trigger Mode  Manual Level  Auto Level   EXT ARM EXT GATE and INHIBIT   Impedance  Coupling  Trigger Level    Setting  Hard Hist    Period  AT  Period     A t Bt  Tl     _   Pulse Width     Event Gate  100  Tus  Positive  Ous  Auto   7   OFF       Tus  OFF       OFF       Tus  OFF  Internal    1M  DC  Manual  OV  50     1 M  fixed   DC  fixed   TTL    IM 704310 01E    ltems that cannot be initialized    13 1 Initializing the Setup Information    The following items are not initialized  They are also not stored     Item    Setup information stored in the internal memory  Date time   Beep sound   Click sound   HDD Motor   Brightness of the LCD monitor   Warning display   Store recall Number    SCSI device settings  Own I
4.      IM 704310 01E 3 3    sjusWainseeyy Bunes a10jog o    3 2 Installing the Instrument    Do not install the instrument in the following places    In direct sunlight or near heat sources    Near high voltage equipment or power lines    Where an excessive amount of soot  steam  dust  or corrosive gases are present   Near strong magnetic field sources    Where the level of mechanical vibration is high    In an unstable place     Installation position  Place the instrument in a horizontal position or inclined position using the stand as  shown in the figure below  When using the stand  pull it forward until it is vertical to the  bottom side of the instrument and lock it  If you are placing the instrument on a slippery  surface  attach rubber feet  two pieces  included in the package  on the rear feet   If you are not using the stand  return it to the original position while pressing it inward        Rack Mounting  Rack mount kits are sold separately   For mounting instructions  see the instruction manual that is supplied with the kit     Name Model Description   Rack mount kit 751533 E6 For EIA single mount  Rack mount kit 751534 E6 For EIA dual mount  Rack mount kit 751533 J6 For JIS single mount  Rack mount kit 751534 J6 For JIS dual mount    3 4 IM 704310 01E       3 3 Connecting the Power Cord    Before connecting the power  Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock and damage to the instrument     AN    e Connect the power cord only after confirming that the volta
5.      Selecting the polarity  2   Pressthe  Inhibit  soft key to select the polarity     YOKOGAWA 1998 61 61 21 26 25  Hardware Hist Pulse Width APL Event 166600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Ciock Int  Auto Arming   Ch    1 606 ChB  6 600       Panorana    Adda i    nis T 2Zus  Histogran 3T  Area  Window    Average 114  42660ns  Haximum 144  000mE  Hininun 99 900ns  Peak   Peak 44  160ns  d          166606    4 40225ns     I        30mnE a na    X1  95 066ns X2  133  000ns AX  38  606nSec  Yi  6 Uz  6 Hun  31764    I 1d   a Gatehode   gEventsize re re Inhibit f Ref  Clock   Event 100000 Arning Block PFF A H Ext      JE JL IL IL An    Selecting the inhibit level  3  Press the INPUT key to display the Inout menu   4  Press the  Setting  soft key to display the Input Setting menu           Input  a Setting   Impedance   Coupling we Level  Inhibit mma pc  TTL    Esc MMT IL IL JE IEE IL     5  Press the  Inhibit  soft key     Input Setting    Ld Cha ChB Arn Gate   Inhibit   Level  TTL    esc  _J  JL    ML JL JL     6      Turnthe rotary knob to select  TTL    TTL 10   or  OV            IM 704310 01E 6 11    jeubis Indu  JUBWaINSeaLy   y  JO SUOI LIPUOD uonisinboy 3y  Huas o    6 5 Setting the Inhibit Function    Explanation    6 12    Selecting the polarity   Select from the following choices  The inhibit input is ineffective if it is turned  OFF     e  H    Inhibits measurement while a positive signal is being applied to the inhibit input  terminal    e      Inhibits measurement
6.      trigger level setting accuracy    slew rate of the start signal slew rate of the stop signal slew rate of the start signa slew rate of the stop signal    IM 704310 01E 15 3    a suonesoads       15 3 Gate  Arming  and Inhibit    Item    External arming input   shared with the external  gate     Inhibit input    Gate    Arming    Inhibit    Specification    Connenctor type  BNC   Input coupling  DC   Input impedance  1 MQ  Typical value        Trigger level  TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   OV   Maximum input voltage  40 V  DC ACpeak    Minimum input pulse width  30 ns   Setup time  50 ns  For the arming to become effective  the arming signal must arrive at least  50 ns earlier than the measurement signal      Connector type  BNC   Input coupling  DC   Input impedance  1 MQ  Typical value        Trigger level  TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   OV   Maximum input voltage  40 V  DC ACpeak    Minimum input pulse width  30 ns   Setup time  50 ns  For the inhibit to become effective  the arming signal must arrive at least 50  ns earlier than the measurement signal      Type  Select from EVENT  TIME  and EXTERNAL   Configurable number of events during event gate  except within the longest sampling time    e Time stamp mode  1 to 512 000   e Hardware histogram mode  1 to 10    accuracty   1   Configurable gate time range during time gate  except within the maximum number of events  of each sampling mode    1 us lt  gate time  lt 10 s  Resolution  100 ns    Allowable time during externa
7.     9  Press the  Arm Gate  soft key           Input Setting Ni    I      i Cha ChB frnveate   Inhibit B  o T          Esc     ALOLLA    10  Turn the rotary knob to select  TTL    TTL 10   or  OV      IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    6 4 Setting the Arming Source  Slope  and Delay    Selecting the arming source   Select from the following choices    e Auto   Arming is activated automatically after the measurement is started    e Ext   Arming is activated by an external arming input signal after the measurement is  Started     When  Ext  is selected  Apply a signal to the terminal  this terminal is shared with the external gate  marked   EXT ARM GATE IN  on the front panel     e Input impedance   1MQ   Typical value       e Input coupling   DC   e Arming level   Select TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   or 0 V   e Maximum input voltage   40 V  DC ACpeak    e Minimum input pulse width   30 ns   e Setup time   50 ns  For the arming to become effective  the arming    signal must arrive at least 50 ns earlier than the  measurement signal      Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed     External arming  shared with external gate  input circuit     5 V       EXT ARM EXT GATE     External arming  47 input terminal     Buffer amplifier       CAUTION    Applying a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the external arming  input terminals can damage the input section        Selecting the slope   Select from the following c
8.     Precautions during connection    Files that should not be deleted   When the internal hard disk is formatted with the instrument  the following files are  created in the root directory  Do not delete these files    If you delete these files  reformat the disk with the instrument     AUTORUN INF    TA520 ICO    Newly created files during connection   Sometimes when a new file is created with the instrument while the instrument and   PC are connected  the PC does not recognize the new file    In such cases  reconnect the instrument and PC according to the steps given in    Connecting the instrument and PC     However  if you are running Windows 95  the following steps can be taken so that the   file is recognized    1  On Windows 95  open the  Settings  tab of the drive   s properties and check the  removable  box    2  Reboot Windows 95    3  After creating a new file with the instrument  select  Refresh  from the Explorer   s   view menu    Select the connected drive in the drive list that appears by selecting  My Computer         Control Panel       System       Device Manager       Disk drives   Double clicking   the drive and clicking the  Settings  tab displays the  Removable  check box  You   can also check the drive letter at the  Current drive letter assignment      Drive letters  If multiple hard disks are connected to the PC or if one hard disk is partitioned into  multiple drives  connecting the instrument may change the drive letters  D   E   etc   of  those dr
9.     e When the instrument cannot read a pre formatted medium  reformat the medium  on the instrument  Make sure to back up important data before formatting the  medium  All data will be erased        Displaying free disk space information  The free disk space of an MS DOS formatted floppy disk is among the information  displayed by pressing the  Media Info  key     Formatting a floppy disk   When using a new floppy disk  you must format it first    FD format   Select the appropriate format for the floppy disk from the following choices   e 2DD 640K   Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 640 KB 8 sectors    e 2DD 720K   Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 720 KB 9 sectors    e 2HD1 2M_   Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 2 MB 8 sectors    e 2HD 1 44M   Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 44 MB 18 sectors     Formatting a disk   The formats of media connected via SCSI are as follows   MO PD_   Semi IBM format  Handled as removable disk   ZIP JAZ   Hard disk format  Handled as fixed disk     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    11 5 Formatting the Disk    Hard disk format  The hard disk format is IBM compatible format     Selecting the format mode   When formatting a medium in an external SCSI device  the following two format modes  are available    Normal   Executes physical format and logical format    Quick   Executes only the logical format    The estimated time needed to format a medium is as follows    For external HDDs  the time will vary depending on the specifications of the drive such  
10.    41  95  000ns 42  133 060ns Ax  3B  pnz   Load Menu          SOO SOs    Looking at the properties  9  Pressing the  Property  soft key in the Load menu displays the properties of the file    that is selected in the list     IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    11 6 Saving and Loading Setup Information    Setup information that are saved   The measurement conditions and display parameters set using the following keys are  stored    MODE key  FUNCTION key  SAMPLE key  INPUT key  DISPLAY key  SCALE key   MARKER key    Selecting the directory   The media that are available are displayed in the File List   Examples    FDO     Floppy disk    SC5    SCSI device with an ID number of 5    SC5 1    The first partition of a SCSI device with an ID number of 5    File extension  The File extension  SET is appended to the file name     Data size  The data size corresponding to one set of setup information is approximately 5 KB     Entering the file name and comments   e The file name should have eight characters or less    e You cannot save to an existing file  no overwriting     e You must specify a file name  Comments can be omitted  For details  see section  4 2     Auto naming function   When  Auto Naming  is turned ON  files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are  automatically created  Specify the common name  maximum of five characters  specify  at the Filename item  that is placed before the three digit number     Specifying the type of files to list  Filter   
11.    Display       a  ten    aiis  i ie   Histogram Style CalcrStat ISI    Esci   ML IL JE ILE IL    5  Press the  Graph Size  soft key to select  Half  or  Full      Set the display format  5  Press the  Statistics    Marker   or  Overlap  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF  for  each        Display Style            C braph rari Rtatistics   Marker oF M  a Item  Half OFF ee OFF ial m   Histogran  SISOS A             IM 704310 01E 7 1        pom dwes sw  oy  ul S NS  Y pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAejds  iq x    7 1 Displaying the Histogram    Explanation  Display size of the histogram  Graph Size   Select from the following two choices   Half  Displays the histogram on the left half of the screen  The right half displays the  Statistics   Full  Displays the histogram on the entire screen     Setting the display format  Style   In addition to the histogram  you can select whether or not to display the following items   e Statistics   Displays the statistics in the main window  The statistical parameters to be  displayed are set in a dialog box that appears when the  Calc Stat  soft  key is pressed  For details  see section 7 6   e Marker   Displays the read out value of the X marker  The marker is set using a  menu that is displayed when the MARKER key is pressed   e Overlap  The ON OFF setting becomes effective only for the following cases   e Time interval measurement with the slope setto A  BtorA B     e Pulse width measurement with the polarity set to kod     ON   Superimpose
12.    Pressing the SELECT key displays the Alert   menu  Turning the rotary knob to  select  OK  and pressing the SELECT key copies the settings such as the center   span  and marker values to the single window  Selecting  Cancel  and pressing the  SELECT key cancels the copying operation     Selecting the window to display  2  Press the  WindowNun   soft key  Turn the rotary knob to select the window to display     Selecting the window mode  For details  see section 8 5     Selecting the modulation method   Select from the following choices    e EFM   A modulation method used on CDs    e EFM    A modulation method used on DVDs  Sometimes called  8 16  modulation   e 1 7     1 7 RLL modulation method  Used on rewritable disks    This instrument provides the following windows for each modulation method     Modulation Method Window Window Size  EFM 3T to 11T 9   EFM  3T to 11T  14T 10   1 7 2T to 8T 7    Selecting the type of the constant T   Select from the following choices    e Measured T   Automatically measures the value of the constant T from the clock  input signal of CHB    e Estimated T   Estimates the value of the constant T from the input signal and the  modulation method     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    8 6 Using the Auto Window Function    Setting the X axis of the window  Automatically sets the values of the following items from the modulation method and the  value of the constant T   e For period measurement and pulse width measurement  Center  Center value    
13.    YOKOGAWA 1998 61 61 21 26 25  Hardware Hist Pulse Width APL Event 1606006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   ChA  1 666 ChB  6 600       Panorana    Adda i    ns T 2Zus  Histogram 3T  Area  Window  Average 114 42660ns  Haximum 144  000m  Hinimun 99 900ns  Peak   Peak 44  160ns              166606    4 40225ns                sens     nz   X1  95 606ns X2  133  000ns AX  38  606nsec   Yi  6 Uz  6 Hun  31764  Funct ion    LT Function______d   Function  Chanel  Polarity  Pulse Widt ChB FU  ee ee ee eee    Selecting pulse width measurement  3  Press the  Pulse Width  soft key           Function     rm 1   Period TI ulse Width                      esc  _     MOL IL IL ILI    Selecting the channel to be measured  4  Press the  Channel  soft key and select  ChA  or  ChB      Function  Function   Channel  ypPolarity  Pulse Widt ChB eu    JL IL ILI Ld Ld    Selecting the polarity  5  Turnthe rotary knob to select the polarity        5 5       U           gt    Ce       gt   D  U   fe   3  3   5   Ce   z  O  Q   D  te     gt   Q   z  D  D       Cc     D  3  D    gt   mp   TI       gt   O     O    gt     2     5 4 Setting the Pulse Width Measurement    Explanation    Measurement range   The measurement range varies depending on the sampling mode   e For time stamp mode   8 ns to 20 ms   e For hardware histogram mode   8nsto3 2us    Selecting the channel to be measured  Select either CHA or CHB     Selecting the polarity   Select from the following choices      Mea
14.   0 Nun  166600006    a 15 8 5 5   i  ia  ile  ila  lla   Conf ig Memory   Selftest  alibration scsi   Next1 2         Esc     E  ILE IE JE ILI    Selecting the memory number  3   Turnthe rotary knob to select a memory number     Recalling  4   Pressthe  Recall  soft key to recall the Sup information   Wi    Store Recall Memory 1666066060          E  PUTERE  re   store     store     Recall FS  Conf ig  reene   nexten      es  _    JL JL JBL ILI    Recalled information  Information that was stored is recalled  The current setup information of the instrument  is changed to the recalled information     Selecting the memory number    Select from the following ten memory locations   0 to 9    IM 704310 01E    Chapter 11 Saving and Loading Data and Connecting to a PC    11 1 Floppy Disks    Floppy Disks that can be Used  The following types of 3 5 inch floppy disks can be used  The floppy disk can be  formatted using the instrument   e 2HD  1 2 MB or 1 44 MB  MS DOS format   e 2DD  640 KB or 720 KB  MS DOS format     Inserting the Floppy Disk into the Drive  With the label side facing left  insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive  Insert the  disk until the eject button pops up     Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive    Check that the access indicator is OFF  then press the eject button     Eject button    Access indicator          CAUTION    Removing the floppy disk while the access indicator is blinking can damage the  magnetic head of the drive and destroy the data
15.   126 MHz 7 63 ns to 8 23 ns 100 ps or less  CHBY  Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz 99 7 ns to 100 3 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz 49 7 ns to 50 3 ns 110 ps or less  40 MHz 24 7 ns to 25 3 ns 100 ps or less  50 MHz 19 7 ns to 20 3 ns 100 ps or less  126 MHz 7 63 ns to 8 23 ns 100 ps or less    IM 704310 01E 14 15    z soueus UIe y pue Huljooyussjqnoiy    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Testing the Pulse Width Resolution    14 16    Instruments required   Prepare the following instruments    Synthesized signal generator   e Frequency range   10 MHz to 50 MHz or higher   e Output level   720 mVrms or higher   e Output level accuracy    0 1 dB or better   e Recommended instrument   8657B synthesized signal generator  by HP     The procedures for testing the pulse width resolution using the recommended  instruments are provided below     Connecting the instruments   e Check that all the instruments are turned OFF  then connect the instruments    e Connect the output of the synthesized signal generator to the input terminal  CHA or  CHB  of the TA520     TA520 Synthesized signal generator   8657B         REFERENCE IN  REFERENCE OUT                                                                                                                                                       OUTPUT    Instrument settings   TA520    e Sampling mode   Hardware histogram mode   e Input settings   DC coupling
16.   50 Q  both CHA and CHB   trigger level   0 V  e Function   Pulse width A  B   e Gate   Event  1000000   e Reference   External   e X Center  X Span     Input Frequency X Center X Span  10 MHz 50 ns 15 ns  20 MHz 25 ns 15 ns  e Y High  10    8657B   e Frequency   10 MHz    20 MHz  e Level   360 mVrms    IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    Test method    e Test the TA520 after a warm up time of 30 minutes     14 6 Executing the Performance Test    e Set the frequency of the 8657B to the values given in the table below  and check that  the measured values  mean value and standard deviation  are within the allowable  range using the pulse width measurement function on the TA520  Perform the same  test on both CHA and CHB     Test results  CHAH      Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz    CHA le    Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz    CHB      Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz    CHB  le    Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz    Mean Value  Measured Value    Mean Value  Measured Value    Mean Value  Measured Value    Mean Value  Measured Value    Allowable Range    48 4 ns to 51 6 ns  23   ns to 26 3 ns    Allowable Range    48 4 ns to 51 6 ns  23   ns to 26 3 ns    Allowable Range    48 4 ns to 51 6 ns  23   ns to 26 3 ns    Allowable Range    48 4 ns to 51 6 ns  23   ns to 26 3 ns    Standard Deviation  Measured Value Allowable Range    120 ps or less  110 ps or less    Standard Deviation  Measured Value Allowable Range    120 ps or less  110 ps or less    Standard Deviation 
17.   Ch  8 600  ChE  6 000             selftest     lt  Panel Test  gt     AX  366  660ns          Ec E ILILILIL      7     Press each key and check that the corresponding key name is displayed on the  screen    Turn the rotary knob to the left and right and check that the correct direction is  displayed on the screen    Press the ESC key twice to return to the self test menu     14 5    z soueusjUleW pue HunooysajqnoIL    14 4 Performing a Self test    Testing the display  4  Press the  Selftest  soft key to display the test item selection menu     selftest       Display  Lee  PHE ILI IE JL IL    5  Press the  Display  soft key   6  Pressing the  Exec  soft key starts the display test              1998 12 07 60 18 42  Hardware Hist Period At Event 166 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  68 600  ChE  6 600          selftest     lt  Display Test  gt              Esc   _  E   JLJILJIL  oa    7  Use the arrow keys to alternately display the test item and test information and  check that there are no black spots or other abnormalities on the screen    8      Turn the rotary knob to check that the brightness of the LCD monitor changes    9  Press the ESC key to return to the self test menu     Testing the board  4  Press the  Selftest  soft key to display the test item selection menu        selftest    ee E  m i O A A A    5  Press the  Board  soft key   6  Pressing the  Exec  soft key starts the board test and the results are displayed   If PASS is not display
18.   Directory    6 1998716728 69 32 Re             X1  95 000ns 42  133 660ns AX  33  pnz  Save Menu          aonn    The  Path         displays the selected medium directory name      Path   FDONTADZO  Space 1412608 byte  File Nane          Keu  gt     1998710728 69 32 Rew  TAGGG   SET 5360 1998710728 69 35 R               IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    11 6 Saving and Loading Setup Information    Setting the file name    7   8     10     Press the  File Name  soft key to display the Save menu    Turn the rotary knob to select  AutoNaming   Press the SELECT key to select  ON   or  OFF     Turn the rotary knob to select  File Name  and press the SELECT key    A keyboard is displayed on the screen  Use the rotary knob and the SELECT key  to enter the file name  For the procedure for entering the file name  see section  4 2    Similarly  enter the  Comment      Saving the file    11     After setting the file name  pressing the  Save Exec  key saves the setup  information to the specified directory  the  Save Exec  key changes to an  Abort   key   Pressing the  Abort  soft key cancels the save operation    a Hist Pulse Width APU Event 166666 R    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  1 60060 Chi  6 600             Path   FDO TASZ6  space 1373096                AutoNan ing          File Name          Comment             xZ  133 000ns  Save Menu       Esci  __      i L l    Looking at the properties    12     Pressing the  Property  soft key in the Save menu displays the 
19.   Estimated T failure   Rest time is too short     Warning Mark    IM 704310 01E    Description    Obtaining a hard copy is not possible while the  measurement is in progress    The data cannot be output while the measurement  is in progress    A hard copy is in progress    Wait until it finishes    The image data are not correct    This screen image cannot be compressed     Description   The set date and time are not correct   The file name is not correct   Found duplicate SCSI IDs    The window mode cannot be changed while  performing inter symbolic interference analysis     Inter symbolic interference analysis cannot be used    with the current settings     14 2 Messages    Page  12 5    12 8    Page  3 10  4 3  11 4  9 2    9 2    Set the polarity to Both in the pulse width measurement     Description    The cooling fan has stopped  Turn OFF the power  immediately     The temperature inside the instrument is too high   Communication driver error     Communication time out error     Turn ON the internal hard disk motor     Description  The maximum number of samples that can be  measured has been exceeded     The time stamp data have exceeded the longest  sampling period     Page    Page  15 1    1 4  15 1    The measured data have exceeded the measurement 15 2  15 3    range     Failed to measure the value of T for the auto window  15 6    Failed to estimate the value of T for the auto  The pause time is too short     15 6  6 6    The following warning mark is displayed at
20.   Half  or  Full      Setting the display format  5    Press the  Panorama    Statistics    Marker   or  Overlap  soft key to select  ON  or   OFF  for each item        Display Style    E      C braph rari Panorama e ay Marker oF  a Item  Half OFF il a OFF aaa eel  Histogran  ee    Selecting the window to display  only during multi window or auto window   7  Press the  WindowNum  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the window     Psp E  a Item  a ry Du indounu  Histogran  Style Calc Stat 3T    esl _lI  JL L L LO E               pom we  oSIH 3IeMpIeH 34  U  S InNs  y penje  panseanw oy  HulAesdsig       8 1 Displaying the Histogram    Explanation  Display size of the histogram  Graph Size   Select from the following two choices   Half   Displays the histogram on the left side of the screen  The right side displays the  Statistics   Full   Displays the histogram on the entire screen     Setting the display format  Style   In addition to the histogram  you can select whether or not to display the following items   e Panorama   Displays a panorama display  For setting the panorama display  see  section 8 4   e Statistics   Displays statistics in the main window  The statistical parameters to be  displayed are set in a dialog box that appears when the  Calc Stat  soft  key is pressed  For details  see section 8 7   e Marker   Displays the read out values of the X marker  The marker is set using  the menu that is displayed when the MARKER key is pressed   e Overlap  The ON OF
21.   Invalid character data      lt  MEAS  MODE gt  Error and the  command that    caused the error    xZ  306  000ns AX  366 600ns          esc  _ L JL JLJL JL      Explanation  When an operation error  a communication error  or a warning occurs  the instrument    creates an error message list and displays a   mark in the top right corner of the screen   The details of the message can be checked by displaying the error log    The    mark remains on the screen until you press the  Clear  soft key in the  Error  Logging  menu to clear the message list     Note  Warning messages cannot be cleared using the  Clear  key  The message will automatically    disappear when the problem is resolved such as by restarting the measurement     14 4 IM 704310 01E       14 4 Performing a Self test    Procedure    1   2   3     Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu   Press the  Next  soft key to display the  Next1 2  menu   Press the  Selftest  soft key to display the Self test menu        ry rs h P aia   Conf ig Henory selftest  Falibratio SCSI Nexti 2      Esc     C  EMLILIL    i    Testing the panel    4     Press the  Selftest  soft key to display the test item selection menu       self test    a Selftest  e         SS ES eS es            Esc L IL IL IL IL I Ld    J   6     IM 704310 01E    Press the  Panel  soft key   Pressing the  Exec  soft key starts the panel test     1998712707 00 17 17  Hardware Hist Period At Event 106 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming
22.   OUT A  L TO  Multiplexer   amp     Comparator   Fractional  Pulse    CHB      MONITOR  0      lt        SCSI amp   HDD    OUT B  TN  V  External Arming Signal  EXT ARM      EXT GATE o   V Inhibit Signal Acquisition Controller  INHIBIT  0     V    IM 704310 01E 1 1    suouny      1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram    Signal Flow   A signal that is input to the input terminal  Ach Bch  is converted to a low impedance  signal by the input amplifier  Input AMP   It is then passed to the comparator where it is  converted to a binary signal  The signal from the input amplifier is also output as a  monitor signal  MONITOR OUT A  MONITOR OUT B      The signal multiplexer selects the measurement signal according to the specified  measurement function  item  and outputs the fractional sections according to the  measurement clock as fractional pulses  The fractional pulse width is measured with 25   ps resolution by the time voltage converter  T V Converter  and sent to the data  generator where the measured data are generated    The TA520 has eight data generator systems that generate data alternately  The  acquisition controller controls the overall acquisition process including the external  arming signal or inhibit signal    In the time stamp mode  both the measured values and time stamp data  elapsed time   are acquired in the acquisition memory  In the hardware histogram mode  however  only  the frequencies of occurrence of each measured value are acquired in the acquisi
23.   Setting the statistical calculation area   3  Turn the rotary knob to select the  Calculation Area  item    4  Press the SELECT key to select  Window    Marker   or  Block      Selecting the statistical parameters to calculate  5  Use the rotary knob to select the buttons under  Statistics  and press the SELECT  key to check them     Selecting  All Clear  and pressing the SELECT key removes all the checks   Calculation Statistics Setting               Calculation Area Windou__Marker_ Block       Statistics Calculate      Do not calculate  LAI Cear              Setting the statistical calculation area   You can set the area over which to calculate statistics    e Window   The entire displayed window    e Marker   The area enclosed by the X1  X2  Y1  and Y2 markers    e Block      When block sampling  the specified block  selectable only during time  variation display    When block sampling is OFF  the entire data set is used to calculate the  Statistics     Statistical parameters to be calculated  Select from the following choices  The calculated parameters and the area for  calculation are different for the histogram and time variation displays     Histogram display Time variation display  e Average e T Average   e Maximum e T Maximum   e Minimum    7T Minimum   e Peak Peak e T Peak Peak   e    e T o   e o Average    T  o Average    e o T e T  P P Average   e E L Error    T RF   e MELE   e Median   e Mode    Constant T  T Value   Set this value only for histogram displays  
24.   The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of  operation  If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual  the  protection provided by the instrument may be impaired  YOKOGAWA Electric  Corporation assumes no liability for the customer   s failure to comply with these  requirements     The following symbols are used on this instrument     A    P RO         Handle with care     To avoid injury  death of personnel or damage to the  instrument  the operator must refer to the explanation in the User   s Manual or  Service Manual    Alternating current   ON  power    OFF  power     ON  power  state    OFF  power  state    i IM 704310 01E    Safety Precautions    Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions  Not complying might  result in injury  death of personnel  or cause damage to the instrument     IM 704310 01E          Power Supply   Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before  turning ON the power    Power Cord and Plug   To prevent an electric shock or fire  be sure to use the power cord supplied by  YOKOGAWA  The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a  protective grounding terminal  Do not invalidate protection by using an extension  cord without protective grounding    Protective Grounding   Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before  turning ON the power    Necessity of Protective Grounding   Never cut off the internal o
25.   Using the ESC key  Press this key to exit the current menu  go back one menu      Using the RESET key  Use this key to cancel the numerical value that was entered using the numerical keys     IM 704310 01E    Chapter 5 Setting the Sampling Mode and Measurement Functions    5 1 Selecting the Sampling Mode        For a functional description  see 1 3      Procedure  1    Press the MODE key to display the MODE menu     When selecting the time stamp mode  2  Press the  TimeStamp  soft key     When selecting the hardware histogram mode  2  Press the  HardHist  soft key     YOKOGAWA 1998 61 01 16 00 44  Hardware Hist Timelnterval ATBL Event 106060 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600Y ChR  1 600       Panorana       J00  Histogram Area  Window Calc  AtBL       Average 5 66925ns  Maximum 24 6755  Minimum  8 325ns  Peak   Peak 32   4660s  dg 3 267255       sens 3 nes  X1     24 525ns KZ  35 475ns AX  66 6060ns  Yi  6 Uz  6 Hun  1666006    esc   Lo LIL ILE LI Ld       Explanation  Selecting the sampling mode  Select from the following choices   e Time stamp mode   Acquires the measured values and their time stamps to  the acquisition memory   e Hardware histogram mode   Acquires the measured values and the frequency of  occurrence of those values to the acquisition memory     Note  If you change the sampling mode or the measurement function  the data acquired up to that  point can no longer be displayed or analyzed  Acquire the data again  or load the da
26.   calculations   e During time variation display  if there are multiple data points at the marker position  the  average value is displayed  If there is no data at the marker position  an asterisk     is  displayed     IM 704310 01E 1 13    ee      1 6 Analysis and Calculation    Statistical Calculation  See 7 6 and 8 7 for the operating procedures     1 14    You can set the area on which to calculate statistics  the constant T  and the parameters  to be calculated     Select the area to be used in the statistical calculations   Select whether to calculate the statistics over the entire window or the area enclosed by  the markers    If the time variation is displayed on data that was block sampled in the time stamp  mode  you can also select the  Block  on which to calculate the statistics    If you are using the multi window or auto window function  the statistics are calculated  over the area enclosed by markers for each window     When calculating the statistics over an area enclosed by markers  For histogram display For time variation display    X1 marker X2 marker X1 marker X2 marker          Y1 marker    Y2 marker       Y marker  4         si tede       Calculate statistics over this area    Setting the slope  Calculation Slope  and polarity  Calculation Polarity    You can specify the slope and polarity for the statistical calculation only for the following  measurement functions    The statistics can be calculated separately on data having the specified slope or pola
27.   e Cables condition  The applied BNC cable  GP IB cable and SCSI cable must be shorter  than 3 meters   The user cannot replace the fuse that is located inside the case  If you believe the fuse inside the case is blown  contact  your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer   Applies to products manufactured after Aug  1999 having the CE Mark  For all other products  please contact your  nearest YOKOGAWA representative   Overvoltage Categories define transient overvoltage levels  including impulse withstand voltage levels   Overvoltage Category     Applies to equipment supplied with electricity from a circuit containing an overvoltage control  device   Overvoltage Category Il  Applies to equipment supplied with electricity from fixed installations like a distribution board   Pollution Degree   Applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid  liquid  or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or  surface resistivity   Pollution Degree 1   Applies to closed atmospheres  with no  or only dry  non conductive pollution    Pollution Degree 2   Applies to normal indoor atmospheres  with only non conductive pollution      15 11    a suonesoads    15 17 External Dimensions    Rear View       ooooo0o000000000000000000000000000000    23 327 28    I  i l    l Pr CU  i      mi S om          20    Unless specified otherwise  the tolerance is  8   However  in cases of less than 10 mm  the tolerance is  0 3 mm        Symbols   DET edhe et Pi teehee aa ciate ong oo ence oe eas eae 8 14  A   Adjustment function
28.   ground     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Test method  e Test the TA520 after a warm up time of 30 minutes     e This test checks the error in the trigger levels by comparing the input DC voltage to    the trigger level set on the TA520     e The input indicator of the TA520 is monitored to detect the actual trigger levels     Test procedure    1    Connect the output of the 7651 to CHA of the TA520     Set the output level of the 7651 to 4 000 V   Set the trigger level of the TA520 to 4 100 V   Start the measurement on the TA520     S ee ae    lights up  record the trigger level as VL   Set the trigger level of the TA520 to 3 900 V     D    Decrease the trigger level of the TA520 by 5 mV steps  When the input indicator    7  Increase the trigger level of the TA520 by 5 mV steps  When the input indicator    lights up  record the trigger level as VH     8  Calculate the mean value of VL and VH and check that the value is within the    allowable range   VTRIG  VL VH  2    9  Set the output of the DC voltage generator to 2 000 V  0 V   2 000 V  and  4 000 V    and repeat the same test   10  Repeat steps 1 through 9 for CHB     Test results  CHA    Voltage of 7651 VL VH VTRIG    4 000 V  2 000 V  0 000 V   2 000 V   4 000 V    CHB    Voltage of 7651 VL VH VTRIG    4 000 V  2 000 V  0 000 V   2 000 V   4 000 V    Allowable Range    3 950 V to 4 050 V  1 970 V to 2 030 V   0 010 V to 0 010 V   2 030 V to  1 970 V   4 050 V to  3 950 V    
29.   internal circuit           Instruments required   Prepare the following instruments    Standard frequency generator   e Frequency accuracy   0 25 ppm or better   e Recommended instrument  5071A  by HP  or 9500 EN100   Frequency counter   e Frequency resolution   1 Hz or better   e Recommended instrument  TA1100 Time Interval Analyzer  oy YOKOGAWA     The procedures for adjusting the time base  reference clock  using the  recommended instruments are provided below     Connecting the instruments   e Check that all the instruments are turned OFF  then connect the instruments    e Connect the output of the standard frequency generator to the REFERENCE IN  rear  panel  terminal of the frequency counter  TA1100  and measure using the external  reference frequency    e Connect the REFERENCE OUT  rear panel  terminal of the TA520 to the CHA  terminal of the frequency counter  TA1100      TA520 Frequency counter Standard frequency   TA1100  generator  5071A   REFERENCE OUT REFERENCE IN    Taso OUTPUT                                                                                        14 8 IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    14 5 Adjusting the Time Base    Instrument settings  TA520   None  TA1100      Function   Frequency A   Gate time   1 ms   Sampling size   1   Sampling mode   FREE   Display   NUMERIC   Input setting CHA   DC coupling  ATT OFF  50 W  trigger level   0 V  REFERENCE   EXTERNAL    5071A   None    Adjustment procedure   Adjust the TA520 after a warm up time of 30 min
30.   key to display the File menu   2  Press the  File Item  soft key to display the File Item menu     ry  Utility    es   JL JL JE JL IL       3  Press the  Function  soft key to display the Function menu      Ja Function fa  i Rename File Name poe Maii  ee                  aE    4  Press the  Rename  soft key to display the File List and Rename menu     Specifying the files to list  5  Press the  Filter  soft key to select  Item  or  All      Displaying the files  6  Select the medium and directory according to the steps given in    Selecting the  directory in which to save the information    in 11 6     Selecting the file to rename  7      Turn the rotary knob to highlight the file you wish to rename     Setting the new file name   8  Press the  File Name  soft key to display the keyboard screen   Enter the file name according to the steps given in 4 2   Pressing the  Enter  key changes the file name     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 23 69 19 53  Hardware Hist Pulse Width AR Event 1606006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Ciock Int  uto Arming   Ch    1 606 ChB  6 606V       Pano  File List       Path   FDO  Space 1203712 byte  File Nane                              95  600ns x2  133 6000ns AX  Sa  660ns     Renane          Eis E 8 of ho lhc    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    11 11 Changing the File Name and Creating Directories    Creating a directory   Display the Make dir menu   4  After step 3  press the  Make Dir  soft key to display the File List and Make Dir  menu     Selecting the d
31.   of the instrument if a SCSI  cable is used to connect the PC to the SCSI  option  of the instrument     Necessities for connection    SCSI cable  50 pin half pitch  pin type   Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length  that has a ferrite core on  each end of the cable  and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Q     Connection procedure    11 26    Changing the ID number of the instrument or the internal hard disk  Before connecting to a PC  change the SCSI ID numbers of the instrument and the  internal hard disk so that they do not overlap with the ID numbers of other SCSI devices  and the PC   1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu   2  Press the  SCSI  soft key to display the SCSI Setting menu   3  Press the  Own ID  or  HD ID  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the ID number     Press the  SCSI Init  soft key to change the ID number     iN       CAUTION    Make sure to follow the connection procedures given below     Connecting the  instrument and PC      Otherwise  the media of other SCSI devices connected to the  PC can be damaged        Connecting the instrument and PC   1  Turn OFF the instrument and PC      Connect the instrument and PC with the SCSI cable      Turn ON the instrument first      Check that the internal hard disk can be accessed   Press the  Utility  soft key of the  FILE key and display the file list       Turn ON the PC     AA W MN    O1    IM 704310 01E    11 12 Connecting the Instrument to a PC
32.   respectively  However  how the monitor signal is  output varies depending on the measurement function     e Time interval measurement   Outputs the signals input to both CHA and CHB    e Period pulse width measurement   Outputs only the signals input to the selected  channels    e Output impedance   50Q  Typical value     e QOutputlevel   Approx  one fourth the amplitude of the input    signal  within     5 V  when the monitor device  receives the signal with an input impedance of 50  Q      Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed        CAUTION    Do not externally apply voltage to the monitor output terminals  It can damage the  instrument        13 5    suoljoun 193410 Buisp EJ       13 4 Checking the Setup Conditions of the  Instrument and the ROM Version                       Procedure  1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu   2  Press the  Next  soft key to display the  Next 2 2  menu   Utility  Foe  oes  aves Bop oe Pom  mea  TL JLILILIL JL rm  Checking the setup conditions of the instrument  3  Pressing the  Setup Info  soft key displays the Setup Information menu  You can  scroll the list by turning the rotary knob   1996 12 66 21 23 15  Hardware Hist Period At Event 166 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  uto Arming  ChA  6 606 ChB  6  600U  Setup Information    Mode HardHist  Function  amp  Slope Period At  Gate Node Event 166  Interval Min  Inhibit Off  Reference Clock Internal  Aarning Auto  Block
33.   soft key   The calibration results are listed           1998 61 01 21 14 16  Hardware Hist Period At Event 100 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming    Ch  6 000  Chi  6 600          Calibration     lt  Calibration Result  gt   DC    Calibration  TA Calibration  Func Calibration    x2  366 6605 AX  366  660ns          es    JL Ji JEJE JL Joo    Explanation  Calibrated items  Using the internal calibration signal  the offset voltage of the input amplifier  DC  Calibration   the conversion factor for the time voltage converter  T V Calibration   and  the measurement function  Function Calibration  are automatically calibrated     Executing the calibration  Execute calibration when the operating environment  temperature  humidity  of the    instrument changes drastically   When the power is turned OFF  the calibration data are reset to their factory default    values  See page 13 3    Calibration results    If the calibration is successful   PASS  is displayed  If itis not   FAIL  is displayed  If   FAIL  is displayed  do a self test  see section 14 4  to inspect the instrument     13 4 IM 704310 01E       13 3 Outputting Monitor Signals     For a functional description  see 1 8      Connection Procedure    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    Connect BNC cables to the monitor output terminals  for CHA and CHB  on the rear  panel of the instrument     The signals corresponding to the input signal of CHA and CHB are output to the CHA  and CHB monitor output terminals
34.   top of the list  or bottom data  bottom of the list     Specifying the block number  Block number is specified only when block sampling is used  The data of the specified  block number are listed  The first data of each block become the top data of the list     Note  If the A or W mark is displayed on the time variation screen  redo the scaling     7 4 IM 704310 01E       7 3 Displaying the Time Variation    Procedure    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 7      1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying the time variation  2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     YOROGAWA 1996 61 62 15 54 24  TimeStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 16006 n   Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 000 ChB  1 606    Interval gus       Panorana    100  6us  120us  X1  106 0us XZ  220  60US AX  126 6us T Num  687  1  mee UZ  see lo ao    Y1   17 400ns Yz  32  660ns AY  56  6060ns    Spay  a Item P ry ry  PE IL IL JL IJ LJ CL     3  Press the  TimeVar   soft key     Display  ten              d Histogram List frinevar   pratistics    Esci  C  E JL JIJLJL I    Set the display size of the time variation  4  Press the  Style  soft key to display the Display Style menu   5  Press the  Graph Size  soft key to select  Half  or  Full      Selecting the display format  5  Press the  Panorama    Statistics   or  Marker  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF  for  each              Sila rh hm lhl    Setting the graticule  2  Press the  Grap
35.   ul S  NSaY pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAeldsig    IM 704310 01E 7 9    7 5 Displaying the Panorama Display    Explanation    7 10    7  Press the  Area  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the range to display in the panorama display     Setting the range to zoom display  8    Press the  ZoomSpan  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the range of the zoom display  size of the zoom box      Moving the zoom position  9  Press the  Position  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to move the position of the zoom box     Setting the speed of movement for the zoom box  10  Pressing the  Movement  soft key and selecting decreases the speed of  movement of the zoom box  Selecting B   increases the speed of movement     Moving the zoom box to the left end  11  Pressing the  Adjust  soft key moves the zoom box to the left end of the panorama  window     Yi  46 925ns Panorama          poe ee  Esc      Inno wo oo    Panorama display   The data can be displayed in the panorama window at the top section of the time  variation display    In the panorama display  a maximum of 6000 s of time variation can be listed and the  waveform in the zoom box can be displayed zoomed in the main window  The panorama  function is used when you wish to look at the entire set of acquired data     Setting the panorama display area   You can set the range of the panorama display  The following ranges are available   0 60 120 300 600 us  1 2 3 6 1 2 30 60 120 300 600 ms  1 2 3 6 12 30 60 120 300 600   1200 
36.  1024  Example  720KB  Storage capacity of floppy disks     Symbols  The following symbols are used in this manual     Affixed to the instrument  Indicates danger to personnel or  AN instrument and the operator must refer to the User   s Manual  The  symbol is used in the User   s Manual to indicate the reference     nN eNi eg Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or  death to the user     CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor or    moderate injury  or damage to the instrument     Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the  instrument     Symbols used on pages in which operating procedures are given   In chapters 3 through 13  on pages where operating procedures are given  the following  symbols are used to classify a description     Procedure Describes the keys used during operation and the operating  procedures  In some cases  you may not have to follow the steps  in the order they are given     Explanation Describes the details of the settings and the restrictions that exist  with the operating procedure  A detailed description of the function  is not provided in this section  See chapter 1 for a detailed  description of the functions     vii    viii       Contents    Checking the Contents of the Package 0 2 0    ccccesescesteseeseesessesteseesearesteseeneateaeaeen i   Safety gd g  or   UL 0  9 keane nen ae ee ee iv   Structure Of the Manual oo    cccsssscescessesesansssesssnsssassavessanse
37.  126 MHz 8 ns 15 ns  e Y High  10    8657B   e Frequency   10 MHz     20 MHz     40 MHz     50 MHz     126 MHz  e Level   360 mVrms    IM 704310 01E    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Test method   e Test the TA520 after a warm up time of 30 minutes    e Set the frequency of the 8657B to the values given in the table below  and check that  the measured values  mean value and standard deviation  are within the allowable  range using the period measurement function on the TA520  Perform the same test  on both CHA and CHB     Test results    CHAT  Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz 99 7 ns to 100 3 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz 49 7 ns to 50 3 ns 110 ps or less  40 MHz 24 7 ns to 25 3 ns 100 ps or less  50 MHz 19 7 ns to 20 3 ns 100 ps or less  126 MHz 7 63 ns to 8 23 ns 100 ps or less  CHAY  Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz 99 7 ns to 100 3 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz 49 7 ns to 50 3 ns 110 ps or less  40 MHz 24 7 ns to 25 3 ns 100 ps or less  50 MHz 19 7 ns to 20 3 ns 100 ps or less  126 MHz 7 63 ns to 8 23 ns 100 ps or less  CHBT  Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz 99 7 ns to 100 3 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz 49 7 ns to 50 3 ns 110 ps or less  40 MHz 24 7 ns to 25 3 ns 100 ps or less  50 MHz 19 7 ns to 20 3 ns 100 ps or less
38.  3 ns    Allowable Range    280 ps or less  190 ps or less  140 ps or less    14 13    z soueus UIeWy pue HunooysajqnoIL    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Testing the Frequency Resolution and the Minimum Measured Value    14 14    Instruments required   Prepare the following instruments    Synthesized signal generator   e Frequency range   10 MHz to 50 MHz or higher   e Output level   720 mVrms or higher   e Output level accuracy    0 1 dB or better   e Recommended instrument   8657B synthesized signal generator  by HP     The procedures for testing the frequency resolution and minimum measured value  using the recommended instruments are provided below     Connecting the instruments   e Check that all the instruments are turned OFF  then connect the instruments    e Connect the output of the synthesized signal generator to the input terminal  CHA or  CHB  of the TA520     TA520 Synthesized signal generator   8657B         REFERENCE IN  REFERENCE OUT                                                                                                                                                       OUTPUT    Instrument settings   TA520    e Sampling mode   Hardware histogram mode   e Input settings   DC coupling  50 Q  both CHA and CHB   trigger level   0 V  e Function   Period A  B   e Gate   Event  1000000   e Reference   External   e X Center  X Span     Input Frequency X Center X Span  10 MHz 100 ns 15 ns  20 MHz 50 ns 15 ns  40 MHz 25 ns 15 ns  50 MHz 20 ns 15 ns 
39.  36     266 2560 3 8658 361 252 125 2 975 29   6 366   0700 3 4966 246 296 125 2 625 17   9T 337 48550 3 4675 166 333 425 1 050 13   16 372 290 4 625 66 364 175 1 775 6   11 416 925 2  725 11 466 675 6 166 2   ISI   gt  iSpace S  Mark    Isl j   Node  Polarity 5 5 5 x   oF ph Pretucen  Pz e  o o 3T 3T  lt     Sets    the analyze the Mark  Lb Ae M A A a A es 33      N an aT T T a data between two Spaces 3T     Statistics of the extracted Mark data  Statistics of all Mark data       C  o   5          gt   D  5  mk  D  T  N   lt   3  o  z4  5     D   h  D         5      D   gt   5  2   lt   o   D   TI  c  5         O  5      O         O  5          Chapter 10 Storing Recalling Setup Information from the Internal Memory    10 1 Storing the Setup Information to the Internal    Memory    Procedure    Explanation    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 8      1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu   2  Press the  Memory  soft key to display the Memory menu     YOKOGAWA 1998710723 08 52 43  Hardware Hist Period At Event 100000000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  0 000V ChE  6 600       Histogram    Area  Window  Average 99  9625675ns  Maximum 100 350ns  Minimum 99   606ns  Peak Peak 750ps  d 77 5900ps       f ons 39  FeO  K1  92 475ns x2  107 473 AX  15 000ns  Yi  6 UZ  6 Nun  166600006    a 15 8 5 5   i  ila  ile  ila  la   Conf ig Memory   Selftest  alibration  SCSI   Next1 2         es     JIL IL IE IL IL    Selecting the m
40.  5       c  mp  o   Q           Sample       a GateNode f Polarity Inhibit f Ref  Clock  External ee DFF    Ext    Esc   _  ML IL JL IL ILI    IM 704310 01E 6 1    6 1 Setting the Gate    Explanation  Selecting the gate mode  Select from the following choices     e Event   Setthe size  range  of a measurement block by specifying the number of  events   e Time   Setthe size  range  of a measurement block by specifying a period of time     e Extemal   Setthe size  range  of a measurement block using the external gate   Since the external gate input terminal is shared with the external arming  input terminal  selecting external gate will prevent the use of external  arming     When  External  is selected  Apply a signal to the terminal marked  EXT ARM EXT GATE  on the front panel   The  terminal is shared with external arming      e Input impedance   1MQ  Typical value       e Input coupling   DC   e Gate level   Select TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   or O V   e Maximum input voltage   40 V  DC ACpeak    e Minimum input pulse width   30 ns   e Setup time   50 ns  For the gate to become effective  the gate signal  must arrive at least 50 ns earlier than the measurement  signal        Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed   External gate  shared with external arming  input circuit     5 V       EXT ARM EXT GATE     External gate  input terminal     Buffer amplifier       A N CAUTION    Applying a voltage exceeding the maximum input volt
41.  6 5  Incorrect reference signal  Check the reference signal  6 7  Cannot save to the The medium is not formatted  Format the medium  11 5  specified medium The medium is not properly inserted  Insert the medium properly  11 1  The medium is write protected  Remove the write protection       Insufficient space on the medium  Delete unneeded files or use 11 9  another medium   Attempted to save while the Save after the measurement      measurement is in progress  completes or stop the measurement   Cannot load from the The medium is not properly inserted  Insert the medium properly  11 1  specified medium Attempted to load while the Load after the measurement 11 6  11 7  11 8  measurement is in progress  completes or stop the measurement   X is blinking in the top The lithium battery is dead  Do a self test  14 4  right corner of the screen  The system is not operating properly   Cannot print to the built in The paper roll is not installed  Install the roll of paper  12 1  printer  The position of the release arm is not Move the release arm to the  HOLD  12 1  correct  position   The printer head is damaged or has Servicing is necessary       worn out   Attempted to print while the Print after the measurement 12 2  12 3  measurement is in progress  completes or stop the measurement   A medium cannot be The cable is not connected  Connect the cable  11 3  recognized  Incorrect SCSI ID number  Set a correct ID number  11 4  Incorrect format  Format the medium  11 5  Medium is da
42.  B    e ALB     Calculates the statistics on the data from falling edge of A to the falling edge    of B   e AtB     Calculates the statistics on the data from rising or falling edge of A to the  falling edge of B     When the measurement function is set to pulse width and the polarity is set to    e fe      Calculates the statistics only on the positive side of the waveform    e   le    Calculates the statistics only on the negative side of the waveform    e  le   Calculates the statistics on both the positive and negative sides of the  waveform     Time interval measurement Pulse width measurement       CalculationsStatistics Setting    Calculationsstatistics setting                         Calculation Area   Window  Marker Calculation Area Window  Marker   Calculation Slope ATEI ATEI AT J Calculation Polarity ELU H Fey  J  T Value 46  G00ns   T Value 46  666ns                  Gtatictice    Note     For multi window and auto window  the statistical calculation area cannot be selected  set to  Marker   The  Calculation Area  item will not be displayed in the dialog box   e when using the auto window function  the value of the constant T cannot be set     8 17    Spo  Wesbo sipy BeMpPJeH 34  Ul S  NS9Y ps e ndjeDg painsesjyy oy  HulAesdsig          8 8 Changing the Scale Value    Procedure     For a functional description  see 1 7      Executing auto scaling  only for single window   1  Pressing the AUTO SCALE key executes auto scaling     Executing manual scaling   1    Pre
43.  CHA  CHB    DC AC   BNC connector   50 Q 1 MQ  20 pF  Typical value       When the input coupling is DC  DC to 200 MHz  Typical value     When the input coupling is AC and   e the input impedance is 50 Q  680 kHz to 200 MHz  Typical value     e the input impedance is 1 MQ  35 Hz to 200 MHz  Typical value       100 ps rms  3 ns   5 Vto5V    When the input impedance is 50 Q  5 Vrms  When the input impedance is 1 MQ and  e DC lt input frequency lt 100 kHz  40 V  DC ACpeak     e 100kHz lt input frequency lt 100 MHz   3 5 f 5 V DC ACpeak   where f is frequency in units    of MHz  Over voltage category   and Il    100 mVp p  400 uVrms  Typical value       Trigger mode  Select from single auto trigger  repeat auto trigger  and manual trigger  Trigger level  during manual trigger    e Range   5 V to 5 V Selectable using panel operation during manual trigger    e Accuracy      10 mV 1  of specified value    e Resolution  1 mV   Trigger level  during single auto trigger and repeat auto trigger    e Range  0  to 100    e Resolution  1     Input signal conditions during single auto trigger and repeat auto trigger  Continuous signal    between 1 kHz and 50 MHz  Time to set the single auto trigger and repeat auto trigger  0 7 s  Typical value       Sampling mode  Select time stamp mode or hardware histogram mode  Maximum sampling rate   43 MS s continuous sampling  approx  23 ns intervals    Maximum sampling size  Maximum number of data points    e During time stamp mode  512 000   e Duri
44.  Calc Stat     Procedure     For a functional description  see 1 7      1    Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   2  Press the  Calc Stat  soft key to display the Calculation Statistics Setting menu     Setting the calculation area  only for single window   3   Turnthe rotary knob to select the  Calculation Area  item   4  Press the SELECT key to select  Window  or  Marker      Setting the constant T   5   Turnthe rotary knob to select the  T value  item    6  Press the SELECT key to display the numerical entry box and set the value using  the numerical keys     Selecting the statistical parameters to calculate   7  Use the rotary knob to select the buttons under  Statistics  and press the SELECT  key to check them   Selecting  All Clear  and pressing the SELECT key removes all the checks     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 22 69 36 66  Hardware Hist Pulse Width APL Event 160600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch    1 606 ChB  6 606V   Panorana    CalculationsStatistics Setting J             Calculation Area Window  __Marker_        T Value 38  G60ns  statistics       Minimum  e  Pe a fo  d Average  o  d T  a  E L Error  0  MELE  e     o  Median  2  Mod  All Clear    Psp E   a Iten  a ra  WindouNu   Histogran  Style Calc Stat 3T  T JL JC  PE IE IL    Selecting the calculation polarity  only for A  B t  A  B    and ke   8  Tum the rotary knob to select the  Calculation Slope   Calculation Polarity  item   9  Press the SELECT key to select one           I
45.  Display a list of the measured data  You can move and display different parts of the list  using the jump function which can move to the top  center  or end of the data or by  specifying the data number  The displayed contents vary depending on the sampling  mode as follows     During time stamp mode   The time stamp and measured values are listed within the range of the number of events  or time specified for the  gate   see section 1 5   The specified data number is  highlighted and the time variation waveform corresponding to the data number displays a  dotted line and a  lt  mark    When block sampling  each block can be individually listed by specifying the number of  the measurement block     Data number  Measured value    Time stamp       TineStanp Measured Data                 Highlights the specified data                16 650 ns    During hardware histogram mode   The measured values  the class values of the histogram  and the frequencies are listed  within the range of the width of the X axis  X Span  of the histogram display  The  specified data number is highlighted and the time variation waveform corresponding to  the data number displays a dotted line and a  lt  mark    When using the multi window or auto window function  the list is displayed for each  window  3T  41  All  etc       Data number    Class value  Frequency          Humber Measured Data Frequency  881 16          Highlights the specified data                   IM 704310 01E 1 19    panied      1 
46.  E L Error  HELE T Nun 166                               Median  Mode    Number 16666          e lf the statistics are calculated on the time variation  o T  E L Error  MELE  Median   and Mode are not calculated or displayed  but T  P P Average  and T RF are   e Ifthe statistics are calculated on the time variation of data that was block sampled   then you can select ALL or Block for the displayed statistics   All   Display all of the statistics on each measurement block   Block   Display only the statistics for the specified block   e You can select the area over which the statistics are calculated from the following  choices   Window  Calculate over the entire window   Marker   Calculate over the area enclosed by the markers   Block  For data that was block sampled  calculate over each measurement  block   Calculate over all the data when block sampling is OFF     For time interval measurement and pulse width measurement  the statistics can be  displayed separately for each slope and polarity setting  see page 1 14    Setting the  slope and polarity         IM 704310 01E 1 21    panied      1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results    For hardware histogram mode   When using single window  you can select the area over which to calculate the statistics   from Window  entire window  and Marker  area enclosed by the markers     When using the multi window or auto window function  the statistics are calculated over   the area enclosed by the markers  The following display 
47.  Gate is open        Not Not measured     Input signal ALOU  St  2  83 s4  5    Start of measurement   Measurement is resumed   Not counted as an    event during inhibition  of measurement     Relation between the inhibit signal and gating external arming    Mesurement is inhibited   Inhibit signal    Gate is open   Gate    External arming              Not Not measured     Input signal a E     ST s2 S3 s4 S     Start of measurement    Measurement is resumed   Not counted as an     event during inhibition  of measurement     Relation between the inhibit signal and gating external arming arming delay  Mesurement is inhibited     Inhibit signal    Gate is open     Gate    Arming delay          Not Not measured     peatsinet ILL     s1  52  83 S4  55    Start of measurement Measurement  Not counted as an 1S resumed   event during inhibition  of measurement     IM 704310 01E    Input Coupling    Input Impedance    IM 704310 01E    1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured     See 6 6 for the operating procedures    When you want to measure just the amplitude  AC component  of an input signal or a  signal riding on top of a certain DC voltage  measurements can be facilitated if the DC  component is removed from the signal  In other cases  you may want to measure both  the AC and DC components of the input signal  In these cases  an appropriate input  coupling is applied to the signal when entering the input amplifier  The following types of  input coupling are 
48.  Int  Auto Arming  Ch  1 600  ChE  1 600    19938701701 16 22 29  Interval Min       Fanorama       Joms  Area  Window Calc AtR4  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Peak   Peak  dg       Histogran    5 66925ns  24 650ns   8  3560ns  32   4660s  3 267255    Sens    X1   24 5503 M2  35 450ns AX  66  006ns  W1  6 Wz  0    Num  166660       esc  K E  ee ee ee Ld Ld    3  Press the  ChA  or  ChB  soft key              Es  PML IL IL ILE ILI    Selecting the input impedance  3  Press the  Impedance  soft key to select 50 Q or 1 MQ      Selecting the input coupling  4  Press the  Coupling  soft key to select  AC  or  DC      Selecting the trigger mode  5  Press the  Trigger  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  Manual    SingleAuto   or  RepeatAuto      Setting the trigger level  6   Pressthe Level  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the trigger level     Input  a setting   Impedance   Coupling Je  Trigger  fg Level  ChB 19   Ac Manual 1 0004       Ed  In H A A ILI    jeubis Indu   u  wnseawn   y  JO suonipuog uonisinboy 3y  Huas o    6 6 Setting the Input Coupling  Input Impedance  and Trigger    Explanation    6 14    Selecting the channel to set  The input conditions of CHA and CHB are selected individually  In addition  if you  selected arming gate or inhibit input  you can set the level     Selecting the input impedance  Select either 50 Q or 1 MQ  Ifthe input coupling is set to AC  the frequency  characteristics vary depending on the input impedance  For 
49.  Marker  Window 126  666ns 106  666ns 146   690ns  Windowz 166  666n  146  666n  150  666ns  Windows 266   b00ns 186  666ns 226   8oons  Window4 246   666ns 226  666ns 266   666ns  Windows 266   666ns 266  666ns 366   666ns  Window6  i 326   0  NE 300     NE 340   00  ME  Window  366   666ns 346   666ns 366   666ns  Windows 400   600ns 380   606ns 426   goons    Windows   440   606ns 426  600nS 466   606ns  Window16 966   666ns 046   666ns 200   666ns                                  Esc JL JL JL IE IL IL 4       m     D     5       r   gt   D     D  D  m            Q  Rime  O            D  emp  D  Q  JJ  D  on        T  5     3  D  L  D     Q     D         T  m     O         9   3         Q  D    IM 704310 01E 8 13    8 6 Using the Auto Window Function    Explanation    8 14    Copying the auto window settings to the multi window  only for period   measurement and pulse width measurement    5   Turnthe rotary knob to select  Copy to Multi Window    Pressing the SELECT key displays the Alert   menu  Turning the rotary knob to  select  OK  and pressing the SELECT key copies the settings such as the center   span  and marker values to the multi window  Selecting  Cancel  and pressing the  SELECT key cancels the copying operation        Alerttt      Select    Window Setting will be copied to Multi Windou       OK   Cancel          Copying the auto window settings to a single window  only for time interval   measurement    5   Turnthe rotary knob to select  Copy to Single Window 
50.  Measured Value Allowable Range    120 ps or less  110 ps or less    Standard Deviation  Measured Value Allowable Range    120 ps or less  110 ps or less    14 17    z soueus UIeWy pue HunooysajqnoIL    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Testing the A to B Interval Resolution    14 18    Instruments required  Prepare the following instruments   Synthesized signal generator  e Frequency range   10 MHz to 50 MHz or higher  e Output level   720 mVrms or higher  e Output level accuracy    0 1 dB or better  e Recommended instrument   8657B synthesized signal generator  by HP   Power divider  e Characteristic impedance   50 Q  e Recommended instrument   700966 Power divider  by YOKOGAWA   The procedures for testing the A to B interval resolution using the recommended  instruments are provided below   Connecting the instruments  e Check that all the instruments are turned OFF  then connect the instruments   e Connect the output of the synthesized signal generator to the input terminal  CHA or  CHB  of the TA520 via the power divider   e Use coaxial cables having identical lengths for the connection from the power divider  to the two input terminals  CHA and CHB  of the TA520   TA520 Synthesized signal generator   8657B     REFERENCE OUT    Q    REFERENCE IN                            O  O                                                                                                                                  OUTPUT       CHA CHB  E Power divider    Instrument settings   T
51.  Samplin Off  Cha Impedance  1M     Use the rotary knob  Cha Coupling nc  Cha Trigger Manual 0 000U to scroll through the  ChB Impedance inf    i  ChB Coupling nC list  ChB Trigger Manual   600U  Arning   Gate Impedance 1M   Arning Gate Coupling Dc  Arning   Gate Level TTL  X1  Ops XZ  300 000ns  Ui    U2  0  Utility  Sipa aa Log Terei   Nextz 2    ee ee ee  Checking the ROM version  3  Pressing the  Version  soft key displays the Version Information menu   Model   7043510 CB F1  Version   6 03  Explanation    Setup Conditions that are displayed   The measurement conditions and display parameters set with the following keys can be  displayed    MODE key  FUNCTION key  INPUT key  DISPLAY key  SCALE key  MARKER key   UTILITY key    ROM version    The model name and suffix code of the instrument and the software version can be  displayed     13 6 IM 704310 01E    13 5 Turning ON OFF the Click Sound  Beep Sound   and Warning Display  Setting the Brightness of  the LCD Monitor    Procedure    IM 704310 01E    1  Pressthe UTILITY key to display the Utility menu   2  Press the  Next  soft key to display the  Next 1 2  menu   3  Press the  Config  soft key to display the Configuration menu     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 28 69 16 38  Hardware Hist Pulse Width AR Event 160600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Ciock Int  uto Arming   Ch    1 000U ChB  0 0GO         Fanorama    Adda i       m       Histogran 3T  Area  Window    Average 114 42500ns    100000  Maximum 143  900ns  Minimum 994  900ms  Pe
52.  Selectable range   1 ns to 250 ns  in 25 ps steps     7 13        pom dwes sw  oy  ul S NS  Y pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAejds  iq x    7 6 Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters  Calc Stat     Selecting the calculation polarity  Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity    Statistics can be calculated on data having the specified slope or polarity  The histogram   corresponding to the specified slope or polarity is displayed in orange  the histogram of   both slopes or polarities is displayed in blue    You can select the slope or polarity only for the following cases    When the measurement function is set to time interval and the slope is set to   A IBtorA B     e AtBt   Calculates the statistics on the data from the rising edge of A to the rising  edge of B    e A Bt   Calculates the statistics on the data from the falling edge of A to the rising  edge of B    e AtB t   Calculates the statistics on the data from rising or falling edge of A to the  rising edge of B    e A  B     Calculates the statistics on the data from rising edge of A to the falling edge  of B    e ALB    Calculates the statistics on the data from falling edge of A to the falling edge  of B    e A B    Calculates the statistics on the data from rising or falling edge of A to the  falling edge of B     When the measurement function is set to pulse width and the polarity is set to  e fe      Calculates the statistics only on the positive side of the waveform   e    e    Calculates the statistics 
53.  Te       Histogram display of the  extracted Mark data                  or er hr or et oe rr   T TREE TOT  Olas HTD NATS   AOS TEED  OTST eT REDT  114 4075     1528   113 050 44  Ca tana  Shia   taaa  147 150100   a    ST 161 8775 Ta ae   863  180 500   4875 ae    oF eg 1675 3  6150 574  214 856 4 156 Ti  S      2500 3 8050         361   286 975   E       5   300 6700 3  4900 236   258 625 625 5  397 4850 34675 1E 336 225 4 166 Z   372 250 4 6z5 368  eo q 856   Isl    space   Mark      Isl     Mode     Polarity ee cS       Target  Horr Hi e iP     be aT T Prev                                  ph  AAR           lt    Sets    the analyze the Mark  date immediately before  the Space 3T  and Mark 7T   sequence       Statistics of the extracted Mark data  Statistics of all Mark data    IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    9 3 Analysis Example    When the trigger is set to Between Space Space     Analyze the Mark data between two Spaces 3T     Mark Space Mark Space Mark Space Mark Space Mark  an jer i sr E er sr  i  Tigger           Analyzes the corresponding Mark data        Histogram All Mark   1900               Histogram display of all Mark  data       Histogram display of the               mm   I z al    i 14T  T avee TAID   OTID ATD T Meeti TSe r    Oms TSD WUSESS  31 114 407 d m20 114 6256 i 165                                  extracted Mark data  PAL   4 148 1925 3 1725 1242 146   7656 2 5290 126   5 181 8775 4 5475 663 181 325 6 050 73   67 217 1675 316156 574 215 956 7 675
54.  There are no data to be saved       SCSI controller failure  The SCSI controller is abnormal       Illegal printer head position  Move the release arm to the  HOLD  position 12 3  Paper empty  The paper roll is empty 12 2  Printer over heat  The printer has overheated      Printer too cool  The printer temperature is abnormal       Printer time out  The printer temperature is abnormal       Printer circuit failure  The printer circuit has malfunctioned      Printer aborted  Printer operation has been aborted         IM 704310 01E    Code  701    708    710    711  712    Message    Stop measurement before using  internal printer     Cannot output data while  measuring     Internal printer in use   Wait a moment     Image data failure   Cannot compress this image     Setting Errors  800 to 899     Code  800  801  802  810    811    Message   Incorrect date time    Illegal file name    Cannot use identical SCSI ID   Cannot change window mode    Setting incomplete to use ISI   Set polarity to Both in Pulse Width  function     System Error  900 and higher     Code  906    908  912    914    918    Message   Fan stopped  Turn OFF the power  immediately    Inside temperature is too high   Fatal error in Communication   driver    A communication time out has  occurred     Turn ON the internal hard disk  motor     Warming  0 to 99     Code  50    51    52    53  54  55    Message  Sample number overflow     Time stamp data overflow   Measurement data overflow     Measured T failure 
55.  as listed on the back cover of  this manual    The ratings of the fuse that is used inside the case are shown below     Location Maximum Rated Maximum Rated Type Standard  Voltage Current  Inlet 250 V 3A Time lag UL CSA certified  CPU board 250V 800 mA Time lag VDE SEMKO certified    IM 704310 01E       14 8 Recommended Replacement Parts    IM 704310 01E    The one year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument  starting from the  day of delivery  and does not cover any other items nor expendable items  items which  wear out   The replacement period for expendable items varies depending on the  conditions of use  Refer to the table below as a general guideline  Contact your nearest    YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts     Part Name  Built in printer  LCD backlight  Internal hard disk    Cooling fan  front   Cooling fan  rear   Backup battery  Lithium battery     Recommended Replacement Period    Under normal usage  120 rolls of paper   3 years   One year after purchase  data on the disk are not  covered    3 years   3 years   3 years    14 21    z soueus UIeWy pue HunooysajqnoIL    Chapter 15 Specifications       15 1 Measurement Input and Trigger    Item   Number of input channels  Input coupling   Input connector   Input impedance    Frequency characteristics    3 dB point     Internal jitter   Minimum input pulse width  Operating voltage range  Maximum input voltage    Input sensitivity    Input amplifier noise  Trigger    Sampling    Specification   2 
56.  cen cebescutesbahnevtaddabentretdsenpenbaderceaunts 7 11  8 9  PUSH IMOSS ASS  haretan a cuaehnanlntas 14 2  AE shasta eae te alata E I E lakes tech 7 10  Area Max issic a eee er er eee eran eee eee 8 8  Area Mitixcccaszesnct acoseccnetennesssiactncesieraane im ascennesetaetagacomens 8 8  PTOW KEYS  corani 4 3  a e   Deeb eee ern enter an tert Riek ere meena eee cer er eee 11 14  AUTO VIG OWS reen 8 13  AUTO  NAMING seasan aE 11 11  PUNO SCALING  srutrai a E 7 16  8 19  Auto window function            cccceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaneeseeeeeeanenseees 1 24  ANINO aeeti ir a E TNE 1 9  6 9  zinio UC AEE EE E A E day EE T 11 20  AUTO  SCANAG eonen r ER 1 24  B   BEIWE EN iaar ee crete aueaeemecem ees 9 5  cece ae es et at ele ee ee 11 14  BOCK DIAGRAM sandara E E 1 1  Block NUMDOF sarcina ha eee eas oon oe 7 4  7 6  Block Sampling wcities es ie 1 7  6 5  DIOCK OZE aia e e ee ee eee 6 6  POT UTI SSS i E E a oes 13 8  C   Calculation Polarity               cccccccccsesseseees 7 2  7 14  8 2  8 17  Calculation Slope                  ssceeeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 2  7 14  8 2  8 17  Caprag skas Gases slant lanes N 1 26  Comor valg Lonn aaa elec ae redone ieee 2 4  Changing the file name           cccccecceecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeess 11 24  GOMDINAUON  area cco ee a ela 9 5  CONNEC Chania a a ae esd eee ea antes  7 6  Copies the X axis setting         cccececccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetens 8 15  Creates a CIFOCtOLY cira ea A A EE EE 11 25  calculation area isis  sess co sanns erased ui
57.  divided into eight sections  Histogram sum  for multi window and auto window only   The center values of the X axis of the histogram of each window are aligned and the  frequencies of each bin are summed     15 5    a suonesoads    15 5 Display 15 6 Auto Window Function    Item Specification    Time variation display  during time stamp mode only   e Scale  X  and Y axis settings of time variation displays  e X Min  Minimum value of X axis  range  0 to 3200 0000000 s  e X Span  Maximum value of X axis   Select from 6  12  30  60  120  300  600 us  1 2  3  6   12  30  60  120  300  600 ms  1 2  3  6  12  30  60  120  300  600  1200  3000  6000 s  e Y Center Center value of Y axis  range   50 ns to 20 000000000 ms  e Y Span  Select from 500 ps  1  2 5  5  10  20  50  100  200  500 ns  1  2  5  10  20  50  100   200  500 us  1  2  5  10  20 ms  e Readout  Values can be read by placing the X and Y markers over the waveform  e Statistical display  Can be turned ON OFF   e Area  Select the area  Window  Marker  or Block  on which to calculate the statistics   e Display parameter  Grid and interpolation display can be turned ON OFF  Plot marks can be set to Pixel or Mark  e Time resolution of X axis  time stamp   100 ns  When the sampling interval is other than 0 us   itis 1 us   List display  during time stamp mode  Lists the time stamps and the measured values at those times  The list can be displayed for each block when block sampling is being used   e The displayed data can be s
58.  e J  Measures from a falling edge to the next falling edge of the input signal     Note  If you change the sampling mode or the measurement function  the data acquired up to that  point can no longer be displayed or analyzed  Acquire the data again  or load the data from a  file     IM 704310 01E       5 3 Setting the Time Interval Measurement    Procedure    Explanation    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 4      1  Press the FUNCTION key to display the Function menu   2  Press the  Function  soft key     YOKOGAWA 1998701701 16 01 46  Hardware Hist TimelInterval ATBL Event 100000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600Y ChE  1 600       Panorana       Toons  Histogram Area  Window Calc  AtBL    Average 5 66925ns  Haximum 24  675ns       Minimum  8 32m  Peak Peak a2  460ns  0 3 26725n8        30S  X1   24 525ns  Wi       E 2ons  x2  35 475ns AX  66  060ns  Yz    Num  166666  Function    J Function___d  Function  Chanel J Slope  TI ATEH  ee ee eee    Selecting time interval measurement  3   Pressthe TI  softkey     Funct ion    E  4 porion     TI   Pulse Widt  E    Esc   _      JC IL IL ILI    Selecting the slope  4   Turnthe rotary knob to select the slope                 Measurement range   The measurement range varies depending on the sampling mode    e For time stamp mode   Ons to 20 ms   e For hardware histogram mode  Ons to 3 2 us   Selecting the slope   e AtB t  Measures the interval from a rising edge of CHA to the first r
59.  for the X axis span    Selections for the maximum value of the Y axis    Selections for the scale type of the Y axis    For time variation display  Range of minimum values of the X axis  Selections for the X axis span    Range of center values of the Y axis  Selections for the Y axis span         50 000 ns to 20 000000000 ms  in 25    ps steps       Select from 1 5 3 7 5 15 30 60 150     300 600 ns  1 5 3 6 15 30 60 150 300   600 us  1 5 3 6 15 30 ms      10 20 40 100 200 400 1000 2000 4000     10000 20000 40000 100000 200000   400000 1e6 1e7 1e8 1e9 Lin   1e1 1e2 1e3 1e4 1e5 1e6 1e7 1e8   1e9 Log       Select Lin  linear scale  or    Log logarithmic scale       O to 3200 0000000 s in 100 ns steps     Select from 6 12 30 60 120 300 600    us  1 2 3 6 12 30 60 120 3800 600 ms   1 2 3 6 1 2 30 60 120 300 600 1200   3000 6000 s         50 ns to 20 ms in 25 ps steps     Select from 500 ps  1 2 5 5 10 20 50     100 200 500 ns  1 2 5 10 20 50 100   200 500u s  1 2 5 10 20 ms    IM 704310 01E    7 16       7 8 Reading the Data    Procedure    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 6      Turning ON OFF the marker  1  Press the MARKER key to display the Marker menu   2  Press the  Marker  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF      For histogram display   Moving the X marker   3  Press the  X Marker  soft key to select  X1  or  X2    Turn the rotary knob to move the marker   The measured value and frequency at the position of the marker are displayed in  the bottom section o
60.  knob or the numerical keys to set the value     Selecting the speed of movement of the marker   6  Pressing the  Movement  soft key and selecting    decreases the speed of  movement of the zoom box  Selecting  gt  increases the speed of movement   YOROGAWA 1996716722 69 44 61  Hardware Hist Pulse Width APL Event 166606 Interval Min    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  uto Arming  Ch  1 000 Chi  6 600       Panorana    Histogran 3T  Area  Window    Average 114  42660ns  Haximum 144  00mE  Hininun 99  900ns  Peak   Peak 44  100m   d       b  g       4 40225ns     I    iail    Wl mn    AX  38  600ns  unm  31704    Sees a   Marker   fJe  3X  Marker fc  fay Marker   Movement WW TOWN   OFF PN  xZ X18XZ   b gt  3T  Simm mm o o          8 20 IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    8 9 Reading the Data    Turn ON OFF the marker   You can read out the data using the marker  The read out value is displayed in the  bottom section of the main window  You can also use the Display key   s  Style  to turn  ON OFF the marker and read out values     Marker types   X Marker X1  X2    Displays the value of the x coordinate  measured value  and the  frequency of the X1 and X2 markers    Y Marker   This marker is used to set the statistical calculation area  This  marker becomes effective when the calculation area is set to Marker     Range of movement of the X1 marker  You can move the marker to the same position as or to the left of the X2 marker     Range of movement of the X2 marker  You c
61.  on the floppy disk        General Handling Precautions of the Floppy Disk  For the general handling precautions of the floppy disk  see the instructions that came  with the floppy disk     IM 704310 01E 11 1    Jd  amp  0  HuljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hulaes 2       11 2 Internal Hard Disk  Option     A    Procedure    Explanation       CAUTION    When using the instrument in an environment with mechanical vibrations  turn OFF  the internal hard disk   s power switch        Turning ON OFF the internal hard disk   1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu    2  Press the  Config  soft key to display the Configuration menu   2 9 0     la  la  aiia  la  le   Config Menory selftest  Ealibratio SCSI   Nextire    esc  KA TL JE JE ILI Ld    3  Press the  HDD Motor  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF            Conf iguration       a a Beep lickSound  HDD Motor LcCIBright _____    Date Time OFF PN    OFF oN forF pN  5  Nexti72    SS T E 1     JE JL IL IL IL          The internal hard disk can be turned ON OFF on this instrument   You can protect the internal hard disk from vibrations by turning it OFF     IM 704310 01E       11 3 Connecting SCSI Devices    SCSI Specifications  Option     Item    Interface standard    Connector type    Electrical specifications    Pin No     1 to 12  13   14 to 25  26   27   28   29   30   31   32   33   34   35 to 37    25 24 23    Specifications    50 pin half pitch  pin type     A terminator is built in     Signal Name    GND  NC  GND   
62.  source   3  Press the  Source  soft key and select  Auto  or  Ext    If you select Ext  external arming  proceed to the following steps  If you select Auto   auto arming   then the following menus will not be displayed        Selecting the slope  for external arming only   4  Select the  Slope  soft key to select  T  or  J      Arming  S0 o EA e SADE anoa  Auto       Yi        F  Esc   __  JL mE Get ILI             IM 704310 01E 6 7    jeubis Indu   u  wnseawn   y  JO suonipuog uonisinboy 3y  Huas o    6 4 Setting the Arming Source  Slope  and Delay    6 8    Selecting the type of arming delay  for external arming only   5  Press the  DelayMode  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  OFF    Time   or  Event      e Set the delay time  when the type of arming delay is set to Time in step 5   6  Press the  D Time  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the delay time        Source          a Gatehode  Events ize Auto  Event 16060  OCJ CO Oe ee    e Set the number of events  when the type of arming delay is set to Event in step 5   6  Press the  D Event  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the number of events        SOUrCe       a Gatehode  fREvents ize Auto  Event 16666    JLILIJLIL m oe    Selecting the arming level   7  Press the INPUT key to display the Input menu    8  Press the  Setting  soft key to display the Input Setting menu   Input    a Setting   Impedance   Coupling   Level  Arn Gate my TIL    es   OL JIL IL JL IE IL
63.  the Y marker  5  Press the  Y Marker  to select  Y1  or  Y2    Turn the rotary knob to move the marker   The measured value at the marker is displayed     Moving the Y1 and Y2 markers simultaneously  6  Press the  Y1 amp Y2  soft key   Turning the rotary knob causes the Y1 and Y2 markers to move together     Selecting the speed of movement of the marker  7  Pressing the  Movement  soft key and selecting    decreases the speed of  movement of the zoom box  Selecting  gt  increases the speed of movement     YOKOGAWA 1998 61 02 16 20 57  TineStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 10000 Interval   us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600  ChE  1 000       Panorana       x1  287  0us XZ  362  6US AX  75 6us  I HEHHE EEEIEE I   see    Uz      9 400nz Yz  21 850ns AY  31 250ns      1   a ____   Marker JOX Marker    WY Marker   gt  Movenent   OFF pn    x1 xiaxz  yi gj vaz b gt    e fF FF Ff fF a7    ui       7 18 IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    7 8 Reading the Data    Turn ON OFF the marker   You can read out the data in the histogram or time variation display using the marker   The read out value is displayed in the bottom section of the main window  You can also  use Display key   s  Style  to turn ON OFF the marker and read out values     Marker types   The marker type is different for the histogram and time variation displays    During histogram display   X Marker X1  X2    Displays the value of the x coordinate  measured value  and the  frequency of the X
64.  the marker position  the average of those values is  displayed   e If there is no data at the marker position  an asterisk     is displayed   e Inthe histogram display  if the value of the Y marker is larger than the maximum value of the  Y axis  Y High   the Y marker is not displayed     7 19    QpoW Adwe1s sw  oy  ul S  NSaY pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAeldsig x    Chapter 8 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results in the Hardware Histogram Mode    8 1    Procedure    IM 704310 01E    Displaying the Histogram     For a functional description  see 1 7      1    Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying the histogram  2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     YOROGAWA 1998 16 22 11 42 47  Hardware Hist Timelnterval ATBL Event 100660 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 000 Chi  1 606       Panorana       Toons  Histogram Area  Window Calc  AtBL    Average 5 66960ns  Haximum z4  100m        Minimum  8   300ms  Peak Peak 32  4606ns        3 267560ns    ns mz  x  i S    nEz     200ns AX  66  006ns  Nun  166666    SF       sep   em  fom    Es   TE JC JE JL LE Ld    3  Press the  Histogram  soft key        Hun   166606          esc  MMT IL IL JE IE IL     Setting the display size of the histogram  4      Press the  Style  soft key to display the Display Style menu     Display       a Iten    h  ai   Histogram Style Calc Stat Window    esc    ML IL JL IL ILI    5  Press the  Graph Size  soft key to display
65.  the top of the screen when there is an error  message or warning message         Hardware Hist Period At  Inhibit Off  Cha  8 660  Chi  6 000V     166    Ref  Clock Int     1998 12 06 22 32 49   Interval Min       Warning mark    Event 100  Auto Arming         Histogran       When you see a warning mark  the error and warning messages can be listed by  pressing the  Error Log  soft key of the UTILITY key to display the error log  If there are  many messages that they do not fit in the window  the rotary knob can be turned to scroll  through the list  For details related to the procedures  see section 14 3     14 3    z Ssoueus UIeW pue Huljooyussjqnoiy       14 3 Using the Error Logging Function    Procedure  1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu     2  Press the  Next  soft key to display the  Next2 2  menu        Utility    ie ry ie  SetupiInfo   Error Log Version   Next2 2      Esc   _  EF C JEJE JL Io    Displaying the error log   3  Press the  Error Log  soft key to display the error log   If there are many messages and they do not fit in the window  the rotary knob can  be turned to scroll through the messages    4  Pressing the  Clear  soft key clears the messages and the   mark disappears           1998 12 06 22 43 11 1  Hardware Hist Period At Event 166 Interval Min    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  6 6060 Chi  6 006          Error Logging  il    Measurement data overf lous     No floppy disk inserted     Setting incomplete to use ISI   
66.  they do not contain files   e fan error occurs while deleting multiple files  the files after the error are not deleted   e Directory attributes cannot be changed        CAUTION    Removing the medium while the access indicator and  2  are blinking can damage  the magnetic head of the drive and destroy the data on the medium        IM 704310 01E       11 10 Copying Files    Procedure    IM 704310 01E    Displaying the copy menu  1  Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE  key to display the File menu   2  Press the  File Item  soft key to display the File Item menu        il   Utility    esc  _ l  JL JLJtLJ4L   i    3  Press the  Function  soft key to display the Function menu           esc  MMM IL IL IE IEE IL     4  Press the  Copy  soft key to display the File List and Copy menu        Function 38   666ns  Pd  Attr    I  o    es A e O             aiia   Dest Dir  C ee    Esc    E IL JLILIJL I    Specifying the files to list  5  Press the  Filter  soft key to select  Item  or  All      Displaying the files  6  Select the medium and directory according to the steps given in    Selecting the  directory in which to save the information    in 11 6     Selecting the file to copy   7  Turn the rotary knob to highlight the file you wish to copy and press the  Set Reset   soft key  The     mark appears  If you press the same key again  the     mark  disappears     Selecting all files to be copied   8  Press the  All Set  soft key to place     marks in front of all file names  the name of  th
67.  to voltage values  which are then converted to  digital values using an 8 bit A D converter    In this way  the instrument is able to measure the time of the fractional pulse at 25 ps  time resolution per 1 LSB  T is determined by substituting the measured times of the  fractional pulses into the variables Ta and Tp of the above equation     eoo  Signal to be measured     ae    Reference clock   3   ta Lt    Fractional pulse a   ee  oe  ee    Time voltage conversion          N   AVa  K Ta   AVb  k Th      A D conversion   A D conversion    T  N to    Ta   Th    k  A D conversion factor    IM 704310 01E 1 3    ere         1 3 Sampling Mode    Sampling Mode     See 5 1 for the operating procedures    There are two sampling modes  time stamp mode and hardware histogram mode  The  sampling method  data acquisition method   the display format after measurements  and  methods of analysis and calculation vary depending on the sampling mode  For details  on the display format  see section 1 7    Displaying the Measured Calculated Results        Time stamp mode   The measured values and their time stamps  are acquired in the acquisition memory and   are handled as time series data  The maximum sampling size  maximum number of   data points that can be acquired  is 512 000 points  There are four types of display   formats  histogram  list  measured values and time stamps   time variation  and statistics      The time elapsed from the point the arming occurred to the point the measurem
68.  while a negative signal is being applied to the inhibit input  terminal     Note  The inhibit signal is valid only within the maximum sampling time after arming activation   Signals outside this range are invalid     When applying the inhibit signal  Apply a signal to the terminal marked  INHIBIT  on the front panel     e Input impedance   1MQ  Typical value    e Input coupling   DC     Inhibitlevel   Select TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   or 0 V    e Maximum input voltage   40 V DC ACpeak    e Minimum input pulse width   30 ns   e Setup time   50 ns  For the inhibit function to become effective  the  inhibit signal must arrive at least 50 ns earlier than the  measurement signal       Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed     Inhibit input circuit     5V          INHIBIT     Inhibit input  terminal     Buffer amplifier       CAUTION    Applying a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the inhibit input  terminals can damage the input section        Selecting the inhibit level  Select from the following choices   TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   and 0 V    IM 704310 01E       6 6 Setting the Input Coupling  Input Impedance     and Trigger    Procedure     For a functional description  see 1 5      1  Press the INPUT key to display the Input menu     Selecting the channel to set  2  Press the  Setting  soft key to display the Input Setting menu     YOKOGAWA   Hardware Hist TimelInterval ATBL Event 100000  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock
69. 04310 01E       8 4 Displaying the Panorama Display     For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     Psp E  a Item  a ry Du indounu  Histogran  Style Calc Stat 3T    es   POL JL IL JL IE ILI    3  Press the  Histogram  soft key     Display Iten Nun  31704                   es   POL JIL IL IE JE IL YI    Displaying the panorama  4  Press the  Style  soft key to display the Display Style menu and press the   Panorama  soft key to select  ON         Display Style    He      n raph Full OFF DN OFF DN PFO FF DN  lm Item  Half OFF OFF OFF OFF  Histogran  So Om Oooo    Setting the range to display in the panorama display  5  Press the SCALE key to display the Scale menu   6  Press the  Panorama  soft key to display the Panorama menu              YOKOGAWA 1998 16 22 69 22 58  Hardware Hist Pulse Width ABU Event 166006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch    1 660 ChB  6 000                   Panorana    Zoom box  i    ons   T 2us  Histogram 3T  Area  Window   100000 i   Average 114 42600ns      Maximum 144   00m          Minimum 99  960ns  Peak Peak 44  100ns        4 40225ns  I  1        30E   nes   X1  95 000ns X2  133 600nS dX  36  0606ns  Yi  6 UZ  6 Num  31764    ee   fax Center J  X Span W  Y High   Y Axis Jo e WindowNu   114  000ns 6ons 1e5 Lin Panorama 3T  TL JL IL IL  Ld Ld          m     D     5       r   gt   D     D  D  m 
70. 1  FACIE INE AREER IE AE E E E A NITT T E E ET etme N A E E E ty er lenses 2 2  Screen DISDIAY ecese a a a E E T A eee 2 3    Before Starting Measurements    Precautions on the Use of the instrument              ccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1  installing the IMNstrumeNnt  errasse eaa eea a naaar an 3 3  Connecting the Power Cord             cccccsssssssssssseeesseeseseseseeeeseeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeenaaaaaaaaaaaaaaasens 3 5  T  rming the Power Switch  ON OFF crura aaa ain a 3 6  Connecting Cables and Probes              ccccccccccccsaseeseeeccceeeeeeeaaaeeeeceeceeeeeesssaeaeaeeeseeeeeeeessaaeaaaeeeess 3 7    IM 704310 01E    A 3 6  3 7    Chapter 4  4 1  4 2  4 3    Chapter 5  5 1  5 2  5 3  5 4    Chapter 6    6 1  6 2  6 3  A 64  A 65  6 6  A 67    Chapter 7    7 1  7 2  1 3  7 4  ies  7 6  Lil  7 8    Chapter 8    8 1  8 2  8 3  8 4  8 5  8 6  8 7  8 8  8 9    Chapter 9  9 1  9 2  9 3    IM 704310 01E    Contents    Calibrating the Probe  Performing Phase Correction              cccccccsesesecceececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeens 3 8  Senno the Date cai  TUN Cassis ede cca Seta a setae a ace nesiceencecedemuece  3 10    Basic Operations    Starting and Stopping the Acquisition of an Input Signal                  cccccccessesseeeeeeceeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeees 4 1  Setting Numerical Values and Strings              cccccccsssseccceeecessseceececeeeseeeeeeceeeaeceeeesseeeseceeeesseaeeeeees 4 2  The Way to Look at the Soft Key Menu 
71. 1 and X2 markers    Y Marker   This marker is used to set the statistical calculation area  This  marker becomes effective when the calculation area is set to Marker     During time variation display   X Marker X1  X2    Displays the value of the x coordinate  time stamp  and the  measured value of the X1 and X2 markers    Y Marker Y1  Y2    Displays the value of the y coordinate  measured value      TimeVariation een  T Average 49 6700ns  T Maxinun 49  925ns  T Mininun 49   375ns          1 1000ns  126uUs  Xi  1 1032ms Ke  1 176 2ms AX  67 Gus T Nun  1000  yi  49 43703 yz  49 63703 AY  6 200ns  Yi  48 175ns Y2  56 675ns Aft  2 500ns    Displays which block the X marker is reading the value  when block sampling   Range of movement of the X1 marker  You can move the marker to the same position as or to the left of the X2 marker     Range of movement of the X2 marker  You can move the marker to the same position as or to the right of the X1 marker     Selecting the speed of movement of the marker   gt      Moves one dot at atime in the window    gt     Moves five dots at a time in the window     Y marker range  during histogram display   O to 512  000    Range of movement of the Y1 marker  during time variation display   You can move the marker to the same position as or below the Y2 marker     Range of movement of the Y2 marker  during time variation display   You can move the marker to the same position as or above the Y1 marker     Note  e Ifthere are multiple data points at
72. 10 100ns 393  200ns  14T   512 5625m 519 800nS 507  1000s  Display    ten  a P Pinoa      bel e  Note    e The value of Center and Span for each window can be set in the soft key menu that is  displayed by pressing the SCALE key    e The value of Left Marker and Right Marker can be set in the soft key menu that is displayed  by pressing MARKER key     8 12 IM 704310 01E       8 6 Using the Auto Window Function     For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   Press the  Window  soft key to display the Window Parameter Setting menu     PD Spay  a Item  a ry Du indounu  Histogran  Style Calc Stat 3T    esc  _  i JL JL JL m_i    Setting the window mode to auto window  2   Turnthe rotary knob to select the  Mode  item  Press the SELECT to select  Auto      Selecting the modulation method  3   Turnthe rotary knob to select the  Modulation  item   Press the SELECT key to select  EFM    EFM    or  1 7      Selecting the type of the constant T  4   Turnthe rotary knob to select  T Type    Press the SELECT key to select  Measured T  or  Estimated T      YOKOGAWA DENKI 1998 16 22 69 33 63  Hardware Hist Pulse Width Aw Event 160600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch    1 606 ChB  6 606   Windou Parameter Setting          Mode Single_Muiti__ Puto _  Modulation  T Type  Measured T  Estimated T     Not Adjustable Below    T Value 40 b  n   Copy To Multi Window                 center Span Left Marker Right
73. 3          File ltem Data Type ry re ra   Measure  Ascii Bin  Load Utility  LT JL_JLC_ I E L JL       Specifying the files to list  6  Press the  Filter  soft key to select  Item  or  All      Selecting the file to load   6  Select the medium and directory according to the steps given in    Selecting the  directory from which to load the information    in 11 6    7  Select the file name according to the steps given in    Selecting the file to load    in  11 6     11 13    Jd  amp  0  BuljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2    11 7 Saving and Loading the Measurement Results    Explanation    11 14    Loading the file   8  Pressing the  Load Exec  key loads the measurement results  binary data  from the  selected file  the  Save Exec  key changes to an  Abort  key   Pressing the  Abort   soft key cancels the loading operation   ae Hist Pulse Width APL Event 166666 sla a te    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  1 000 Chi  6 606       Pano  File List        Path   FDO    Space 541184 byte  Siz    File Nane           FD  1        114  42560ns  DUD DC 1   WUF 399912 1998 01 05 07 08  DYD DCO2Z   WUF 85784 1998 01 05 07 11  DYD DDG1   WUF 138628 1998 01 05 67 61 44  000ns  HH_PER   WUF 138628 1998 16 21 18 12 3 39825ns  TS_BLK1  WUF 85784 1998 10 21 18 62            95  000ns Xz  133 000n3  Load Menu       Esed JLILILIML   i       Selecting the data type   Select from the following choices    Bin   Saves the measured data in binary format  You can load the data after savin
74. 3000 6000 s    Setting the range of the zoom display   You can set the range of the zoom display  size of the zoom box   The following ranges  are available    6 12 30 60 120 300 600 us  1 2 3 6 12 30 60 120 300 600 ms  1 2 3 6 12 30 60 120 300   600 1200 3000 6000 s    Moving the zoom position    You can set which section  zoom position  of the data in the panorama display on which  to zoom     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    7 5 Displaying the Panorama Display    Adjustment function   This function is used to move the zoom box to the left end of the panorama window   which is useful such as when the zoom box is outside of the panorama window    When the zoom box is outside the panorama window  the following marker is displayed  in the panorama window          A section of the zoom box extends beyond the right end of the panorama display   gt      The zoom box is beyond the right end of the panorama display     Selecting the speed of movement   gt       Moves one dot ata time in the window    gt      Moves five dots at atime in the window     Note    Changing the size or position of the zoom window also changes the  X Span  and  X  Minimum  values of the SCALE key     7 11    QpoW Adwe1s sw  oy  ul S  NSaY pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAeldsig x       7 6 Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters    7 12     Calc Stat     Procedure     For a functional description  see 1 6      1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   2  Press the Calc Stat  soft key to 
75. 4  Le LSM eet TANEN SEA E EEEE A A E tia RM E EA 7 8  Statistical calculation parameters                  ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 14  Statistical parameter             cccccceseeeeeeneees 7 8  7 13  8 6  8 17  SALISH O Snin O r 1 21  7 7  8 5  Ore a E ee ter eR oon es Oe ee 10 1   S  A     EE E E tener te Series tee ee 7 2  7 6  7 8  8 2  8 6  nS Ung  aah  6  AWeeeeerieteese acer ere eraem Miter Sts ekki encarta eee renee 8 12  SUMMAUON CISDIAY  sperra R 1 23  sampling Merva l ean e a a 1 8  6 4  sampling MOUE  saai ateei gen E E E 1 4  5 1  S sh hati eae ade tannt vou auetestetanee a eatea  11 8  11 12  11 16  Screen Mage aisre ara ia a E EE 12 8  Setup INFOFMATION  mesi anorni ao ne n 11 8  SODE reai e eakadsaaseaelens 5 2  5 3  sont key Men risia a ede el 4 4  SPACE isi ien A E N E A 9 5  standard aCcessories         ceccccccececcaessseeeseeeeeeeeeseauaueaseeeeeeeseess jii  Start the measurement             nnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 4 1  statistical calculation             aannnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 1 14  Statistical calculation area          sseeoesennennnnonnennrnenn  7 13  8 17  stop the measurement           eect eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeneeeeeees 4 1  T   PU INU Je sae a ie etnies tes ere Abie at eo ane ae  1 13  Time Interval Measurement            ccc cece cecee esse eee eeee eee 1 5  5 3  Time Varnation soviet due cee tae ele ets ea lee tetas 1 20  7 5  TING Cale ets taetsa ied A a eomes cited ee ioedetoane  1 8  Time Stamp Mod
76. 6 1 Setting the Gate        For a functional description  see 1 5      Procedure  1  Press the SAMPLE key to display the Sample menu   2  Press the  GateMode  soft key to display the Gate Mode menu     YOKOGAWA 1998701701 16 09 54  Hardware Hist TimelInterval ATBL Event 100000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600Y ChE  1 600       Panorana       J00  Histogram Area  Window Calc  AtBL       Average 5 66925ns  Maximum z4  05mE  Minimum  8   350m   Peak   Peak 32   4660s  dg 3 267255    Sens   mz  X1   24 5503 x2  35 450ns AX  66  006ns    W1  0 UZ  6 Hun   196660  a Gate  ode   gEventsize  Event 1906600  BAL ILILIL IL IL 4    Selecting the gate mode  3  Press the soft key corresponding to the desired gate mode     166060                      Es    E A A IL IL ILI    When event gate  Event  is selected  4  Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the number of events  Event       Size    Sanp le    GateMode   gEventsiz ry ry Inhibit Ref  Clock  Event 100000 rning Block A H Ext    Esc    E OLL    When time gate  Time  is selected  4  Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the gate time     Sample  fgGateTime ry Inhibit Ref  C lock  1 0us        Arning       Esc   _      JC JEL ILE ILI    When external gate  External  is selected  4  Press the  Polarity  soft key to select the polarity     O   D     m    Q      gt   D   gt   O  2  S           O      O  O      Q      O           O     h  mp   gt   D     D      V  c     D  3  D     mmh 
77. 7    Histogram Display        Average  Calculates the average value of the histogram  Pi is the relative frequency        n  Average   X  X xP   i 1    Ifthe total number of samples on which the statistics are being calculated is N   and the frequency of occurrence  number of samples  of a certain bin is Ni  then    the relative frequency becomes Pi   Ni N     Maximum value   Indicates the maximum class value    Maximum    X   max   Minimum value   Indicates the minimum class value    Minimum    X  _   min   Peak to Peak    Calculates the difference between the maximum and minimum values   Peak  Peak   Maximum     Minimum    IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    1 6 Analysis and Calculation    Standard deviation  c    Calculates the standard deviation of the histogram  This indicates the degree to  which the values are spread out from the average value  Pi is the relative  frequency     n    o     X X      Average     xP     i 1    Flutter  o Average   Measures the flutter of the histogram  Indicates the spread in the values from the  average value in terms of a percentage of the average value     o   Average          x100      Average    o T  Calculates the histogram jitter using the specified constant T  Indicates the spread  in the values in terms of a percentage of the value T      T  2 x 100     o T        Effect Length Error  E L Error for short   Xcenter   S the center value of the x axis in the window  See section 1 7 for details   Originally  Xcenter represented the valu
78. 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results    Time Variation Display  See 7 3 for the operating procedures   During the time stamp mode  the measured data and time stamps are treated as data  and acquired to the acquisition memory  The time variation display function uses this  time series data to display the variation of the measured value in relation to the elapsed  time since the arming   You can manually set the X axis  time  and Y axis  measured data  for the time variation  display  You can also have them set automatically using the auto scale function  The  following items can be set   e The minimum X axis value  X Minimum   e The center value of the Y axis  Y Center   e The X axis width  X Span   e The Y axis width  Y Span     Y axis span  Y Span  Displacement in the positive direction from Y center             Cae TineVariation  Y axis J  center value    q 25ns gt   X axis min  value Displacement in the positive  Displacement in the negative direction from X minimum    direction from Y center         X axis span  X Span     Items that can be displayed  Besides the histogram  you can select whether or not to display the marker read out  values  the statistics  and a panorama window     Panorana     erative Panorama window        TOOLS  TimeVar iation aa       Area  Window  T Average 4993 995003  T Maximum 500   2061s  T Mininun 499   775ns    T Peak Peak  425ps Displays statistics    7   Sps    T d  T   d Average  6 015447   T RF 6 685661    X2  4  SUS AX  36 0us T 
79. 75 176  145 1575 3 0550 1246 147 0625 3 1775  181 4925 3 4775 853 182 356 3 375  216 9656 3 0475 86 216 606 3 550  266   2500 3 0656 361 Z394 175 3 350  300   0700 R 246 293 406 3 575  337   4856 i 336   986 3 273  372 20 i 364    3  a  416 925                                           esc    E ML IE IL IL    When the extraction mode is set to Single  Selecting the trigger  4  Press the  Trigger  soft key to select  lt D or        Selecting the window that will activate the trigger  5  Press the window setting soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the window that will activate the trigger     Selecting the data to be extracted  6  Press the  Target  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  Prev       Next      or  Both         ISI co  Space    _  Mark  arity              a O E Om    IM 704310 01E 9 3       C  o   5   amp       gt   D  5  mk  D  T  N   lt   3  o  z4  5     D   h  D         5      D   gt   5  2   lt   o   D   TI  c  5         O  5      O         O  5        9 2 Setting the Conditions for Data Extraction    When the extraction mode is set to Combination  Selecting the trigger  4  Press the  Trigger  soft key to select     or        Selecting the window to that will activate the trigger  5  Press the window setting soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the window to that will activate the trigger     Selecting the data to be extracted  6  Press the  Target  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  Prev     or  Next         ISI c_o 3pace aiir    SSS r 
80. 9 24 10 24 R U                ad  MZ  133 600ns AX  38 000ns      Copy                il   Property    es  _ Ji JL JE JL IL      Setting the file attributes  12  Turn the rotary knob to highlight the desired file and press the  Attr  soft key to  select  R  or  R W      11 22    IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    11 10 Copying Files    Copies the files that are saved on the floppy disk  internal hard disk  or external SCSI  device to the specified medium     Selecting the files properties to list  Filter   See section 11 9     File attribute   You can set the attribute for each file  The following two attributes can be specified   e R W  Read and write possible   e R   Read only    Note   e You cannot copy files while the measurement is in progress  Press the START STOP key to  stop the measurement    e fan error occurs while copying multiple files  the files after the error are not copied    e Directory attributes cannot be changed    e Ifa file with the same name exists at the destination  copying is not allowed    e You cannot copy the same files to another directory immediately after copying those files   You must again select the files you wish to copy    e Ifthe WVF file is copied when  Filter  is set to  Item   the HDR file is also copied     11 23    Jd  amp  0  buljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hulaes 2       11 11 Changing the File Name and Creating  Directories    Procedure  Changing the file name  Display the Rename menu  1  Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE
81. A520    e Sampling mode   Hardware histogram mode   e Input settings   DC coupling  50 Q  both CHA and CHB   trigger level   0 V  e Function  A to B interval   e Gate   Event  1000000   e Reference   External   e X Center  X Span    e When AtBtoraA B     Input Frequency X Center X Span  10 MHz Ons 15 ns  20 MHz Ons 15 ns    e When AtB orA Bt    Input Frequency X Center X Span  10 MHz 50 ns 15 ns  20 MHz 25 ns 15 ns  e Y High  10    8657B   e Frequency   10 MHz    20 MHz  e Level   720 mVrms    IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Test method   e Test the TA520 after a warm up time of 30 minutes    e Set the frequency of the 8657B to the values given in the table below  and check that  the measured values  mean value and standard deviation  are within the allowable  range using the time interval measurement function on the TA520  Perform the same  test on both CHA and CHB     Test results    A BI  Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz  1 ns to 1 6 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz  1 ns to 1 3 ns 110 ps or less  AIB   Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz  1 ns to 1 6 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz  1 ns to 1 3 ns 110 ps or less  A  B    Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz 48 4 ns to 51 6 ns 120 ps or less  20 
82. Allowable Range    3 950 V to 4 050 V  1 970 V to 2 030 V   0 010 V to 0 010 V   2 030 V to  1 970 V   4 050 V to  3 950 V    14 11    z soueus UIe y pue Huljooyussjqnoiy    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    Testing the Input Sensitivity    14 12    Instruments required   Prepare the following instruments    Synthesized signal generator   e Frequency range   10 MHz to 50 MHz or higher   e Output level   720 mVrms or higher   e Output level accuracy    0 1 dB or better   e Recommended instrument   8657B synthesized signal generator  by HP     The procedures for testing the input sensitivity using the recommended  instruments are provided below     Connecting the instruments   e Check that all the instruments are turned OFF  then connect the instruments    e Connect the output of the synthesized signal generator to the input terminal  CHA or  CHB  of the TA520     TA520 Synthesized signal generator   8657B         REFERENCE IN  REFERENCE OUT                                                                                                                                                       OUTPUT    Instrument settings   TA520    e Sampling mode   Hardware histogram mode   e Input settings   DC coupling  50 Q  both CHA and CHB   trigger level   0 V  e Function   Period A  B   e Gate   Event  1000000   e Reference   External   e X Center  X Span     Input Frequency X Center X Span  10 MHz 100 ns 15 ns  20 MHz 50 ns 15 ns  40 MHz 25 ns 15 ns  e Y High  10    8657B   e Frequen
83. CAL key  Release remote mode    COPY MENU key  Set copy  Chapter 12      TASS EC me vena anavzern O YOKOGAN INTERVAL ANALYZER YOKOGAWA NA  gt     il Eject button  Eject floppy disk   Section 11 1     Floppy disk drive  Access indicator  ESC key  _    d Clears soft key    P menu  LA    C3 CS SJSeSseSseSsese3    _                      WS  Laas Gas aaa ease E ENS Soft keys                     mone anc  sure  meor  feck gk  SELECT key   psPLav   scaLe  marren  UTILITY  Section 4 3   Rotary knob    Set numbers   move markers   select files  etc   Section 4 3      Arrow keys   Move across digits  when setting  numerical values   backspace   Section 4 2        EXT ARM  EXT GATE INHIBIT      T     Inhibit input terminal A  WEEE PEELE EE External arming input         ae terminal  shared with    the external gate  Power switch Numerical keys input terminal  A   Section 3 4  CHA CHB input indicator    Blinks when input signal is being applied and the trigger is activated  CHA CHB input terminal A    Connect input signal cables  Section 3 5   START STOP key    Start stop continuous measurement  Section 4 1   SINGLE key  Carry out one measurement  Section 4 1      IM 704310 01E 2 1    Sed JO S  SN pue SOWePN         2 2 Rear Panel    Adjustment hole for the reference clock frequency  Used to adjust the time base  Section 14 5    Reference input terminal A  Inputs external reference clock  Section 6 7      Reference output terminal A  Outputs reference clock  Section 6 7      CHA CHB monit
84. D  HD ID    GP IB settings  Gpib Address  Endian   Start Data   End Data   Data Type   Data Select    File   File Item  Data Type  Stat Item  Auto Naming  File Name  Comment    UTILITY key  Function  Filter   FD Format  Format Type  Partition Num    Copy   Copy to  Image   Image Format  Half Tone  Compression    Calibration data    Note    Factory default settings    Initial settings on page 13 2  Date and time of shipment  ON   ON   ON   4   ON   0       LSBFirst           Ascii   Time Stamp    Setup  Ascii  Hist  OFF     TA520       609     Delete   All   2HD 1 44 M  Quick        Printer   Copy   TIFF   OFF  Black and white   OFF    Values calibrated in standard operating  conditions     e When initialization is executed  operations in progress such as measurement and calculation    stop     e To reset all the settings  reset to factory default   turn ON the power while pressing the  RESET key  Note that when the power is turned ON while pressing the RESET key  the  setup information stored in the internal memory is also reset     13 3    suoljoun 193410 Buisp EJ       13 2 Calibrating the Instrument     For a functional description  see 1 8      Procedure  1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu     2  Press the  Next  soft key to display the  Next 1 2  menu   3  Press the  Calibration  soft key to display the Calibration menu     Utility    il  h  ih  ili  il   Conf ig Menory Selftest  Falibratio SCSI   Nextir2    esc   JL JL   ML JL ICO    4  Press the  Exec
85. DBO   DB1   DB2   DB3   DB4   DB5   DB6   DB7   DBP  GND    Pin No     38  39  40  41  42  43  44  45  46  47  48  49  50    Beya E 3 2 1  lt     Pin numbers          50 49 48    oo0o0000000000000000000000  onmpopoaocoonno0ocncaonaonoo0nn0           28 27 26        O    Necessities when connecting a SCSI device    SCSI cable    SCSI Small Computer System Interface   ANSI X3 131 1986    Single ended  See the chart below for pin assignments     Signal Name    TEMPWR  GND   ATN  GND   BSY   ACK   RST   MSG   SEL   C D   REQ    O    Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length  that has a ferrite core on  each end of the cable  and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 Q     Connection Procedure    1  Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the back of the instrument   2  Turn ON the SCSI device and the TA520   For formatting media  follow the steps given in    11 5 Formatting the Disk        SCSI devices that can be connected  Most SCSI devices  MO disk drive  hard disk  and ZIP  can be connected to the   instrument  but there are some exceptions  For example  only hard disks that have a  capacity of 2 GB or less can be used     Note    When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain  attach a SCSI terminator to the device at    the other end of the chain     IM 704310 01E    Jd  amp  0  Nunosuuos pue geq Hulpeo7 pue HbulAes 2       11 4 Changing the SCSI ID Number    Procedure    Explanation    11 4    Changing the ID number of the instr
86. E E EE cee AE ce 11 6  11 7  G   Graph Parainete san A 7 6  GRAM SIZE borio suas evens Pace ce  7 2  7 6  8 2  E ae Deere E ne eerie IE eee eer E eee ee ee cenerer ee 7 6   0 Fz Waar ae ar ee aire toe Rete On et E SE EEE E E E 1 8  6 2  H   POD MOOK acacia he esd ath Rotated ols deat eee 11 2  Plellt TOM Crees a eae lee re hee 12 8  Hardware histogram mode                     eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4  5 1  PISIOOMANT tetera eMac estoe A eee 1 18  7 1  8 1  ID DUMBO T ie ec ee 11 4    Index 1       Ta ELE etn seat secures EENE I E T A EA 1 26  9 2  HEALS CTO siie a a a satan etvand 13 2  Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function               1 26  9 1   META GIIMIGMONY seess mt ches nitactanabdis ent eeteedesndaadeentans 10 1  ICON Zinnia a toma iocandianot a 2 3  Lg  6  9  a E E SEEE A T A E AEE E ET 1 10  6 12  inhibit input terminals               ccccccccccecsesessseeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeees 6 12  NOULCOUDIDO iaia a a 1 11  6 14  input impedance acc s s2 cvaczs socgatedacancchaces baaeaneeneies ences  1 11  6 14  K   KC VD ONO a5  dad soca e Sad added uainsee ch edad udselnduaiferect cacbdoan ested 4 2  L   LC DMON LOR soc cece ae eee Je eee ee 13 8  L G AE E EA EEEE E E AEE EE 1 19  7 3  8 3  HAUN DANE E ta ceca 3 6  Oad er a e a a a 11 10  11 13  M   MODEL aranan a evecare tuaeaneaes ji  Manual scaling seson 1 24  7 16  8 19  Manual tigge enso neerne Serene cert rete mn pre pemtir ner tere het 1 12  Maximum  Sampling  SIZ 4 icici deseo 15 1  Meas  red T arene er ete et
87. F setting becomes effective only for the following cases   e Time interval measurement with the slope setto A  BJorA  Bt   e Pulse width measurement with the polarity set to kad     ON   Overlaps the histogram of the slope polarity that is selected with the  Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity item  displayed in orange  and the  histogram of both slopes polarities  displayed in blue     OFF   Displays the histogram of the slope polarity that is selected with the  Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity item  displayed in orange  and the  histogram of both slopes polarities  displayed in blue  in separate windows    The following combinations of slopes and polarities can be selected   e Time interval measurement  ATBt A Bt  AIBT  AtB A BJ A B     e Pulse width measurement    _     lA   foto    For the procedures related to setting the Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity item in  the Calculation Statistics Setting menu  see section 8 7     Selecting the window to display   You can select the window only when using the multi window or auto window function   Displays the histogram of the selected window  The following windows can be selected   e Window specified in the Window Parameter Setting menu   3T  4T  etc     e All  All windows    e Summation    8 2 IM 704310 01E       8 2 Displaying the List    Procedure    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 7      1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying the list  2  Press the  Item  sof
88. GP IB Interface comes standard with the instrument  The measured data can be  transferred to a PC for analysis or an external controller can be used to control the  instrument     Storing and Recalling Setup Information   See chapter 10 for the operating procedures   Up to 10 sets of setup information can be stored in the internal non volatile memory  The  stored information can also be recalled to set up the instrument  This function is useful  when the same setup is used often     Saving and Loading Data from Floppy Disks  the Internal Hard Disk  and External SCSI  Devices  See chapter 11 for the operating procedures   The floppy disk  FD  drive comes standard with the instrument  An internal hard disk can  be installed as an option   The setup information or measured data can be stored and loaded whenever it is  necessary  You can also save an image of the screen in TIFF  BMP  or PostScript  format  You can create reports by pasting the screen image data to a document created  using a word processor     Initialization of Setup Information  See chapter 13 for the operating procedures   The setup information can be reset to their factory default settings     IM 704310 01E 1 25    aaia      1 8 Other Functions    Calibration  See 13 2 for the operating procedures   Using the internal calibration signal  the offset voltage of the input amplifier and the  conversion factors of the time and voltage converters can be calibrated  Calibrate the  instrument when the ambient environm
89. KB maximum  when the number of    blocks is 100     For hardware histogram mode  Single window   1 KB  Multi window auto window   3 KB maximum  when window size is 16     Entering the file name  See section 11 6     Note  e You cannot save while the measurement is in progress  START STOP indicator is ON    e The statistical calculation results cannot be re loaded     Properties  Lists the file size  the date it was saved  the attribute  and the comment        CAUTION    Removing the medium while the access indicator and   lt   are blinking can damage  the magnetic head of the drive and destroy the data on the medium        11 17    Jd  amp  0  buljoouUOy pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hbulaes 2       11 9 Deleting Files    Procedure  Displaying the Delete menu  1  Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE  key to display the File menu   2  Press the  File Item  soft key to display the File Item menu        re  Utility    ee eee  3  Press the  Function  soft key to display the Function menu       a Function re Filter  Delete fet nesed   All Set   Property jitem f1    ttr   fer exer    ooo ees               esc  MMT IL IL JE EEL     4  Press the  Delete  soft key to display the File List and Delete menu     Function 38  000ns    l Delete   copy Rename Make Dir Format    esc  PL JL IL JL IE IL    Specifying the files to list  5  Press the  Filter  soft key to select  Item  or  All                              Displaying the files  6  Select the medium and directory according to the steps given in    Se
90. M 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    8 7 Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters  Calc Stat     Setting the statistical calculation area   When using a single window  you can set the area on which to calculate statistics   e Window  The entire displayed window    e Marker   The area enclosed by the X1  X2  and Y markers     Statistical parameters to be calculated  Select from the following choices     e Average e o Average  e Maximum e E LEnrror   e Minimum e MELE      Peak Peak e Median   e    e Mode   e o T    Constant T  T Value   Selectable range   1 ns to 250 ns  in 25 ps steps     Selecting the calculation polarity  Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity    Statistics can be calculated on data having the specified slope or polarity  The histogram   corresponding to the specified slope or polarity is displayed in orange  the histogram of   both slopes or polarities is displayed in blue    You can select the slope or polarity only for the following cases    When the measurement function is set to time interval and the slope is set to   AtB  orAtB     e A  B t   Calculates the statistics on the data from the rising edge of A to the rising  edge of B    e AlB t   Calculates the statistics on the data from the falling edge of A to the rising    edge of B    e AtB t     Calculates the statistics on the data from rising or falling edge of A to the  rising edge of B    e AtB    Calculates the statistics on the data from rising edge of A to the falling edge  of
91. MHz 23 7 ns to 26 3 ns 110 ps or less  AIB    Frequency  8657B  Mean Value Standard Deviation   Measured Value Allowable Range Measured Value Allowable Range  10 MHz 48 4 ns to 51 6 ns 120 ps or less  20 MHz 23 7 ns to 26 3 ns 110 ps or less    14 19    z soueusjUleW pue HunooysajqnoIL       14 7 Replacing the Power Fuse    A    Specified Rating       e To avoid fire  use only a fuse having the specified rating  voltage  current  and  type   Make sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before  replacing the fuse    e Never short the fuse holder        The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows   Maximum rated voltage  250 V  Maximum rated current  3A    Type   Time lag  Standard   UL CSA certified  Part number   A1436EF    Replacement Procedures    14 20    Follow the procedures below to replace the power fuse    1  Turn OFF the power switch    2  Unplug the power cord from the power outlet    3  Place the tip of a Philips screwdriver in the dented section of the fuse holder on the  power connector side and move the driver in the direction of the arrow to remove the  fuse holder      Take out the shortened fuse that is attached to the tip of the fuse holder      Attach a new fuse to the holder and then place the fuse holder back in its original  position     O  gt        Note        SSS  The user cannot replace the fuse that is located inside the case  If you believe the fuse inside  the case is blown  contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer
92. Maximum 25  900m   Minimum  10  700ms   Peak   Peak 36   666ns  dg 4 49456ns       3EMs BHN  X1     24 266ns x2  J5 800nz AX  66 6060nS  Yi  6 Yz  6 Hun   16066    MI A U  E X center f  X span o Y High   Y Axis  5  600ns 6ons 1e5 Lin    ne E E Oe       For time variation display     Setting the minimum value of the X axis  2  Press the  X Minimum  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the value     Selecting the X axis span  Press the  X Span  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the value     a    Setting the center value of the Y axis  4  Press the  Y Center  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the value     7 15    QpoW Adwe1s sw  oy  ul S  NSaY pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAeldsig x    7 7ChangingtheScaleValue o    Explanation    e Selecting the Y axis span  5  Press the  Y Span  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the value     Panorana       TimeVariation            5ns       166  6us     126us       al    Scale  fal X Minimum    X Span lA    Center e    Span  a  166  6us 126us   606ns Sons Panorana  mn ah lh im    The instrument provides both auto scaling and manual scaling functions     Auto scaling    Sets the X  and Y axes automatically according to the measured data     Manual scaling    You can also manually set the X  and Y axes  The setting parameters are different for  the histogram display and time variation display as follows     For histogram display  Range of center values of the X axis    Selections
93. Num  120  Yz  566  6560ns AV  6 625ns    Y1  499 875ns Y2  500 100ns AY  225ps Displays readout values       Time stamp displayed at half size    Display method  You can select whether or not to show the grid and whether or not to connect the data  points with a line     1 20 IM 704310 01E    1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results    Statistics Display  See 7 4 and 8 3 for the operating procedures   The statistics are calculated over the area and on the items that are specified in the  Calculation Statistics setting menu that is accessed with the  Calc Stat  soft key  A list of  results is displayed  For information on the parameters of the statistical calculation  the  details of the calculation  and the area  see section 1 6    Analysis and Calculation     The  displayed results vary depending on the sampling mode     For time stamp mode  You can select to calculate the statistics of the histogram or of the time variation   Depending on the above selection  the statistical parameters that can be calculated vary     When calculating the statistics When calculating the statistics  of the histogram of the time variation  Statistical parameter Statistical parameter    Statistical calculation Statistical calculation  area area  pred  Window CAIC Statistics Yalue TimeVariation     Va lue    en Statistics           I  Statistics T  Average 37 0573  T Minimun 36  825s  one  T 100   Ops  T   P PAverage  1  4166697                Minimum  Peak Peak          i  T  o Average   
94. PROPCHICG sree vasasabteescesecedests arl eavearenedt 11 11  Pulse Width Measurement                cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5  5 5  panorama WINGOW  siise iia oerien siaren paiar 1 22  patse UME oitir re e a e ae 6 6  olol Elan Ee EE E EE E E E EE 5 6  6 12  DOS WION Saigo oe sere ct tamed eee Aste 7 10  8 8  PMO COV ON aan A 12 3    QU e a a STOR Alena 11 7  R  RESET Key rene aa N et eA eR Oe 4 4  FROMM E Eeee  a E AEA EE EE 13 6  RACK TOUN a S 3 4  Readout FUNCTIONS Serenar a E N 1 13  Rer FRane nae a a NR 2 2  Recalled ninaa a A tec iat ce 44 bela 10 2  Reference Signal cccinweedin awk aan  6 15  Reference input sacra natocc sets h iets wastennscealederedyss 1 12  1 25  Reference output             cccccecsssseeeeeeeeesseeeeseseessseeeees 1 12  1 25  Repeat auto trigger cist encsivncseleee wanted incen 1 12  RESE VON sonaa a N TaN 6 6  RESME mrar a A N a NN 6 6  read O  bre e N ee eee 7 19  8 21  reference input terminal                  cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 15  release Armann a aomieoms 12 2  roli pae eera a a et eenee  12 1  12 2  rO KOOD ea E S 4 2  4 4  S  ase ee pursues E A E eam EEA TEE tele  11 3  SCSLHUDNUMDe Pisana ai 11 4  DCO OCVICSS ei aa EAN 11 3  Scale Vale arda a ana a ees 7 15  8 18  Selecting the directory         cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 8  11 11  Soles aaa Aerated eat a en ib ee  1 26  14 5  SOLU COMGIMON a e RSE 13 6  SMOE esaea E E R 9 5  Single aut rigger Aereo re a A TES 1 12  IM 704310 01E    SOM KEV MEI harese 2 
95. Space Mark Space Mark Space Mark  OD  i  Trigger Trigger Trigger   ee cst ES       Histogran All Mark     Histogram display  of all mark data          Histogram display of  extracted mark data                     CT     J  Y 1528 w 3 425    _   542  5455   863   180 1750   8 0225 253  6156 S74 213  B25 A  b025 126  4900 236 297  175 4 858 65  101 372 750 os  66   39 450   200 24  11 416 925  gt  1708 HE 6    47 F 1525  5 181 8775    ais  217 1075  71 260 2500 i  3   ap             300 0700       J1 337 4050                         Statistics of the extracted mark data  Statistics of all mark data    1 26 IM 704310 01E    Chapter 2 Names and Uses of Parts       2 1 Front Panel    MODE key  Select the sampling mode  Section 5 1     FUNCTION key  Select the measurement function  Section 5 2 to 5 4     SAMPLE key  Set gate  block sampling  arming  inhibit  and reference clock  Chapter 6    INPUT key  Set input coupling  input impedance  and trigger mode  Section 6 6  6 7    DISPLAY key  Set the display format  calculation  and multi window  Chapter 7    SCALE key  Set the manual scaling  Section 7 7  8 8     MARKER key  Set the read out marker  Section 7 8  8 9     UTITLITY key  Initialize setup  store and recall from internal memory  etc  Chapter 10  13    INITIALIZE key  Initialize setup  Section 13 1     FILE key  Save and load data from a medium  Chapter 11     AUTO SCALE key  Execute auto scaling  Section 7 7  8 8     COPY key  Copy to the specified device  Chapter 12     LO
96. T    Ic  ATBT  Calculation Area i l Ss       Displays A  BI          Calculation Slope                   1666000 T Value 19 106ns     Statistics     i 3 32506ns  a     d Average f     o  E L Error      MELE Displays AIB t  fo  Median  0  Mode   Fons All Clear 30m only  Xi   12  Yi                 Display  a Iten re re   ee EC    Histogram style CalceStat ou   JORMS  O  K1   12 100ns X2  4   900ns AX  66 000ns    Display style    Wi  6   _____braph Size Btatistics   Marker Overlap Ld  a Item  Half Full  OFF pN forr pn ON   Histogran       Note  e Continuous measurements are possible if the period of CHA is 23 ns or more and the time    between the slope of CHB and the slope of CHA is 13 ns or more   A 1B f Example    Continuously measures t2 when the Measures t3 and not t2 when the  period of CHA is 23 ns or more  period of CHA is less than 23 ns   MeasurementMeasurement Measurement Measurement  t ren BR Z   BPR   B   cHAAf    f    ca f    f  i f 71  CHB   CHB    23 ns  or more  e If you change the sampling mode or the measurement function  the data acquired up to that   point can no longer be displayed or analyzed  Acquire the data again  or load the data from    the file       3         13 ns or more 13 ns or more      23 ns or more    CS E       5 4 IM 704310 01E       5 4 Setting the Pulse Width Measurement    Procedure    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 4      1  Press the FUNCTION key to display the Function menu   2   Pressthe  Function  soft key  
97. TAS2 0  Time Inter val Analyzer    USER S MANUAL    YOKOGAWA    Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 704310 01E  2nd Ed iti    ition    Foreword    Notes    Trademarks    Revisions    Disk No  HF09  2nd Edition  November 1999  YK     Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA TA520 Time Interval Analyzer    This User   s Manual contains useful information about the precautions  functions  and  operating procedures of the instrument  To ensure correct use  please read this manual  thoroughly before operation    Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises    The following manual is also provided in addition to this manual     Manual Name Manual No  Description  TA520 GP IB Interface IM704310 12E Describes the communication  User   s Manual functions of the GP IB interface     The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of  continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions  The figures  given in this manual may differ from the actual screen    Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of  its contents  However  should you have any questions or find any errors  please contact  your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual    Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without  YOKOGAWA    s permission is strictly prohibited     MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation   Other produc
98. The paper starts changing color at around 70  C  It is affected by heat  humidity  light    and chemicals regardless of whether the paper has been used of not  Note the following   points    e Store the paper in a cool  dry  and dark place    e After opening the package  use it quickly    e Ifthe paper is left in contact for long periods of time with plastic film  Such as a vinyl  chloride film or Scotch tape  containing plasticizers  the paper will lose some of its  ability to reproduce color  As a result  for example  if you are going to store the paper  in a folder  use a folder made of polypropylene    e When using glue on the paper  do not use a glue containing organic solvents such as  alcohol or ether  as they will change the color of the paper    e For prolonged storage  we suggest you copy the roll chart  Due to the characteristics  of the thermal sensitive paper  the recording section may lose color over time     Precautions on use   e Use only rolls of paper provided by YOKOGAWA    e Touching the paper with sweaty hands can leave finger print marks or blur the printing    e Rubbing the surface with a hard object can cause the paper to change color due to  the heat caused by friction    e If chemicals  oil  or other liquids come in contact with the paper  the paper may  change color or the printing may fade     IM 704310 01E 12 1    sobew  u    1  9S Buljndino R    12 1 Attaching the Paper Roll for Printing    Installing the Paper Roll    Lock release lever    Relea
99. Tx Label   Span  Window width    A window width closest to but larger than the value T  Left Marker   Center   T 2  Right Marker   Center T 2    e For time interval measurement  Center  Center value    T 2  Span  Window width    A window width closest to but larger than the value T  Left Marker   Center   T 2  Right Marker   Center T 2    Note  e The following items in the dialog box cannot be set   T Value  Label  Center  Span  Left Marker  Right Marker  e For time interval measurements  you can only select  T 2  for  WindowNum   You cannot  select  All  or  Summation    e When making period or pulse width measurements and the constant T is set to  Measured T    set the measurement channel to CHA     Copying the auto window settings to multi window   Copies the X axis setting that was automatically set based on the measured value of T to  the multi window  Use this function when you wish to make measurements using the  value that was automatically measured    This function is available for period measurement and pulse width measurement     Copying the auto window settings to a single window   Copies the X axis setting that was automatically set based on the measured value of T to  the single window    This function is available for time interval measurement     Selecting the window to display  For details  see section 8 5       pom WeiHo siH BeMpPJeH 34  UI S  NSOY psa ej NndjeD painsesjyy oy  HuiAesdsig          8   Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters    8 16    
100. U  eee  Y1   17 466ns Yz  32 6660ns dY  56 6066ns  Sanp le    1  a Gate  ode f  Eventsizgig Interval fa a Inhibit f Ref  Clock  Event 10000 ous   Arming Block FF  A H Ext     JLILILIL JL E          Explanation  Connecting a BNC cable  Connect a BNC cable to the reference input output terminal on the rear panel of the    instrument     REFERENCE  IN OUT     Reference input  Reference output    terminal  terminal   10 MHz 1 Vp p 10MHz 1V p p    Reference input circuit Reference output circuit     lt  100 pF 1 5 KQ   50 Q 470 pF  22 KQ    Inputting an external reference clock signal  Apply an external reference clock signal to the reference input terminal   e Inputfrequency range   10 MHz  10 Hz    O   D     m    Q      gt   D   gt   O   Q  S           O      O  O      Q      O           O     h  mp   gt   D     D      V  c     D  3  D     mmh  5   O  c  mp  o   Q           e Input impedance   1kQ or more     Input coupling   AC      Inputlevel   1 Vp p or more    e Maximum input voltage    10 V    IM 704310 01E 6 15    6 7 Inputting Outputting the Reference Signal    A       CAUTION    Applying a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the reference input  terminal can damage the instrument        Outputting the reference clock signal   Outputs the reference clock signal from the reference output terminal  The selected   reference clock described in the earlier section    Selecting the reference    is constantly   output from this terminal    Output frequency    10MHz Ty
101. Using the Rotary Knob and Select Key                   008 4 4    Setting the Sampling Mode and Measurement Functions    Seleciing Ine Samping Mode essas cones on ks sole E taal eh asus Gee ae 5 1  Setting ihe  Period Measurement  anon ce wali en dl dec tecneu entation abet coals  5 2  Setting the Time Interval Measurement            cceeeeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeseaeaeaeseseeeeeeeessaeeaseeeeess 5 3  Setting the Pulse Width Measurement               ccccceeeeeecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesseeseeaeeeseeeeeeesessssaaeseees 5 5    Setting the Acquisition Conditions of the Measurement Input    Signal   Senno Me Gala ose steals at nal Back cate hie ole haan aa i celal acta E tina iuiaal a 6 1  SEMING He Samping MIENAS 6 4  Performing Block Samping sess scece hee cceee Soe a a E toms E 6 5  Setting the Arming Source  Slope  and Delay                ccccccccsccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaaaeaeess 6 7  Stm He    IANO IE UCL OM eretia a a a a a e a N 6 11  Setting the Input Coupling  Input Impedance  and Trigger                  cccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 6 13  Inputting Outputting the Reference Signal             ccccccssssscccececeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeas 6 15    Displaying the Measured Calculated Results in the Time Stamp  Mode    Display the FAISLOQN AIM eet silo iors a teint a aaa amen aces  7 1  Displaying ANG  LIST faicccnnite sesdendsaeeea acter E E eae 7 3  Displaying the Time Variation 62 ccciccaceceaieead   contobeeacec
102. You can  select whether the rising or falling edge is used to activate the arming  The following  signal levels  arming levels  are available  TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   and O V     Start of measurement Arming    Measurement  _______   block     See 6 4 for the operating procedures    When using external arming  you can delay the start of the measurement by a certain  amount of time or number of events after an arming occurs    There are two types of arming delays     Time delay  The measurement starts after being delayed for the specified time  up to 1 s      Event delay  The measurement starts after being delayed for the specified number of events  up to  1000000      aaia      1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured    Inhibit     See 6 5 for the operating procedures    You can inhibit measurements by applying a signal to the INHIBIT input terminal  This is  possible even while the gate is open or during measurement after arming activation  You  can inhibit measurements for time periods as long as the longest allowed sampling time   see page 1 4     You can select whether the positive or negative polarity of the signal will be used to  inhibit the measurement  The following signal levels  inhibit  are available  TTL  1 4 V    TTL 10  0 14 V   and O V    The following examples show some of the relationships between the inhibit signal and  gating arming     Relation between the inhibit signal and gating    Mesurement is inhibited   Inhibit signal   
103. You can specify the type of files to display    e Item  Displays only setup information files   e All   Displays all files on the medium     Properties  Lists the file size  the date it was saved  the attribute  and the comment     Note  e You cannot save or load while the measurement is in progress  START STOP indicator is  ON    e If you change the file extension on a PC  for a example  you will not be able to load that file   e A maximum of 35 characters can be displayed in  Path   If the directory is changed when the  length of the  path  string exceeds 35 characters  an error  601  occurs and the directory  cannot be changed        CAUTION    Removing the medium while the access indicator and    are blinking can damage  the magnetic head of the drive and destroy the data on the medium        11 11    Jd  amp  0  buljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hulaes 2    11 7 Saving and Loading the Measurement Results    Procedure  1  Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE  key to display the File menu   2  Press the  File Item  soft key to display the File Item menu        File       aFile ltem Data Type ra ra r  Measure  Ascii Bin  Load Save Utility  ee ee ee    3  Press the  Measure  soft key           File Item    i File  Setup   Measure  peatistics a a  Save Utility  es eee  ee ee ee    Selecting the data type  4  Press the  Data Type  soft key to select  Ascii  or  Bin               Saving the measurement results  Selecting the file in which to save the results  5  Press the  Save  soft key 
104. age to the external gate input  terminals can damage the input section        Selectable range for the number of events   The number varies depending on the sampling mode  This value can only be set when  the gate mode is set to event gate    e During the time stamp mode   1 to 512 000   e During the hardware histogram mode   1 to 10      Note    _  e After arming  if the maximum sampling time elapses before the specified number of events is  reached  then the measurement block stops at that point   e The gate level is set using the INPUT key     6 2 IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    6 1 Setting the Gate    Selectable range for the gate time   The selectable range is as follows  This value can only be set when the gate mode is set  to time gate    1u sto 10s  in 100 ns steps     Note    If the number of events  Samples  reaches the maximum number of events for the appropriate    sampling mode before the specified gate time elapses  then the measurement block stops at  that point     Selecting the polarity   Select from the following choices  It is set only when the gate mode is set to external   gate    e       Measures while a positive signal is being applied to the external gate input  terminal  EXT ARM EXT GATE            Measures while a negative signal is being applied to the external gate input  terminal  EXT ARM EXT GATE     e Even if the external gate is continuously open for a long period of time  the measurement  block ends when the number of events reaches the maxi
105. ak Peak 44  000ns  d 4 39825ns  I  i           sens 5 ns   X1  95 6066ns XZ  133  066ns AX  38 606ns   U1  6 Uz  6 Hun  31763  Utility    ia  ile  ile  la  aiia   Conf ig Memory selftest  Falibratio SCSI GPIB   Next 2    Esc   PE JL JL IL JL IL    Turn ON OFF the beep sound  4  Press the  Beep  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF            Turn ON OFF the click sound  4  Press the  Click Sound  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF      Setting the brightness of the LCD monitor  4  Press the  LCDBright  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the brightness     Turning ON OFF the warning display  4  Press the  Warning  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF      Conf igurat ion          Esci      WLI    13 7    suoljoun 193410 Bbuisp a    13 5 Turning ON OFF the Click Sound  Beep Sound  and Warning Display  Setting the Brightness of the LCD Monitor    Explanation    13 8    Turning ON OFF the beep sound  You can set whether or not to sound a beep when a warning message is displayed on  the screen  The default setting is ON     Turning ON OFF the click sound  You can select whether or not to sound clicks when turning the rotary knob  The default  setting is ON     Setting the brightness of the LCD monitor  The brightness of the LCD monitor can be adjusted  The darkest setting is  0  and the  brightest setting is  7      Turning ON OFF the warning display  You can set whether or not to display warning messages  The default setting is ON     Note            e Even if the warning display is turne
106. alue using the numerical keys   If the    mark is displayed on the soft key  you can use the numerical keys to set the  numerical value    1    Press the numerical keys to enter a numerical value    2  Pressing a unit key or ENTER key confirms the value     E This box appears when entering values with the numerical keys           Canceling the numerical value set with the numerical keys  2  Pressing the RESET key before the value is confirmed cancels the value that is  being set     Setting a numerical value using the rotary knob   If the    mark or the    mark is displayed on the soft key  you can use the rotary knob to  set the value    1    Move the cursor to the desired digit using the arrow keys   K L gt 2      2  Turn the rotary knob to select the desired value     Setting a string  keyboard operation    1  Turn the rotary knob to highlight the desired character   If a string is already entered  such as a file name  move the cursor to the desired  position using the arrow keys    2  Pressing the SELECT key  confirms the input character    3  Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters    4  Moving the cursor to  ENT  on the keyboard and pressing the SELECT key  confirms the string and the keyboard disappears     String input area       IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    4 2 Setting Numerical Values and Strings    Setting a numerical value using the numerical keys   If you press another key before pressing a unit key or the ENTER key  the value that yo
107. alues shown on the bottom of the graph represent the following    X1  X coordinate  measured value  of the X1 marker   V1  Y coordinate  frequency of occurrence X1  of the X1 marker   X2  X coordinate  measured value  of the X2 marker   V2  Y coordinate  frequency of occurrence X2  of the X2 marker   AX  X2 X1 Num    Number of samples used in the statistical calculation    Histogram       les    X1 marker       X2 marker    Se i aan  lt       Y marker              750ps GNE  7 O0ps  X1  499 760ns K2  566  366ns AX  666ps  Wi  3 V2  3 Num  10000            Readout values   For time variation displays   The values shown on the bottom of the graph represent the following    X1  X coordinate  time stamp  of the X1 marker   V1  Y coordinate  measured value  of the X1 marker   X2  X coordinate  time stamp  of the X2 marker   V2  Y coordinate  measured value  of the X2 marker   AX  X2 X1 AV   V2   V1     Y1  Y coordinate  measured value  of the Y1 marker   Y2  Y coordinate  measured value  of the Y2 marker             AY   Y2 Y1  T Num  Number of samples used in the statistical calculation  TineVariation    2560ps   as Pf apap pp tft   lt  2 marker   rere  4 E  came ac eae            e 4         Y1 marker    250ps              UE  60US  X1  11 5us KZ  47  5us AX  36 0us T Num  171  Yi  566 675ns V2  500  050ns AV  6 625ns  Yi  499 875ns YZ  560 100n  AY  225ps    FF Oo  Readout values    Note  e The Y marker on the histogram display is used to set the area for performing statistical
108. ama display  waveform in the zoom box  can be displayed in the  main window  zoom display   You can move the zoom box in the panorama window     For time stamp mode    Displays the time variation waveform in the  g zoom box in the main window    Panorana          Panorama window    1 25ns    Panorama display area       Main window       5 1 5      1 1660ns  1205    For hardware histogram mode    Left most value of the panorama display  Panorana  E Displays the time variation waveform  C    in the zoom box in the main window          Histogram    100000 Panorama window    Right most value of the panorama  display  Main window       TUN lI u Ly all    IM 704310 01E    Multi window function  See 8 5 for the operating procedures        IM 704310 01E    Displays the 3T window in the main window   Set the window size and etc  in the screen  shown on the right     Main window    T Value       Calculation Statistics Setting      1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results       When the distribution of the data of one measurement block is distributed over multiple  center values on the X axis  multiple histograms are created  You can simultaneously  display all the histograms in the main window  However  you can also set multiple  windows and display each histogram in its own window and observe it in detail  The  function that allows for the setting of multiple windows and the display of the histogram of  each window is called the multi window function  Up to 16 arbitrary sized wi
109. an move the marker to the same position as or to the right of the X1 marker     Selecting the speed of movement of the marker        Moves one dot ata time in the window      gt      Moves five dots at a time in the window     Range of movement of the Y marker  O to 1 000 000 000    8 21    QpoW Wesbo sipH BeMpPJeH 34  UI S  NS9Y ps e ndjeDg painsesjyy oy  HuiAesdsig       Chapter 9 Using the Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function  Option     9 1 Using the Inter symbol Interference Analysis  Function        For a functional description  see 1 8      Procedure  Using the inter symbol interference analysis function   1    Press the MODE key to display the Measurement Mode Selection Menu   2  Press the  TimeStamp  soft key        Mode    Esed Jt JL JL JL JL IL    3  Press the FUNCTION key to display the Function menu   Set the  Function  to  Pulse Width  and the  Polarity  to  k4     Function  Function  Chamel  Polarity  Pulse Widt ChB Piel    4  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   5  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     Display  a Iten Py re  Histogran Style CalcrStat  ee eee ee ee    6  Press the  Histogram  soft key     Display  ten     d fristogray List TimeYar  Btatistics Le a  ISI             Nun  10000                      7  Press the  ISI  soft key to display the inter symbol interference analysis function  setting menu     Spd  a Iten Py ra  Histogram Style CalcrStat    Esc     JL JL E JL    8  Press the  ISI ON OFF  soft 
110. ana       ns  ZUS  Histogran Summation  Area  Marker       166606             Max imum  Mini en a  Peak Peak  36 800ns Statistics of  g i the summed  histogram    38  666ns      statistics    il TT  fo  dvAverage    d   o  E L Error  0  MELE   o  Mode    Histogram of  the sum of all                      windows  Calculates the rr m      statistics onthe  seen  swe    tester   Pury  Semin  checked  parameters  Sum    1 23    1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results    Auto window function  See 8 5 for the operating procedures    This function is used to measure the signal of several RLL  Run Length Limited  symbols   for which the data rate is unknown  The clock period T is measured  and the X axis   values are automatically set    The following modulation methods are supported    e EFM modulation   e EFM  modulation   e 1 7 modulation   There are two methods of automatic setting    e Measured T  Apply the input signal to CHA and the read out clock signal to CHB  The  value of T is measured from the period of the clock signal    e Estimated T  The value of T is estimated from the frequency distribution of the input  signal and the modulation method  This is used when the clock signal  cannot be inputted     Select the method of automated measurement  Auto window  Select the modulation method       Window Paraneter Setting          Mode Single Mu a Modulation  EFM_EFM  1 7_p  T Type  Measured T  Estimated T    Not Adjustable Below    alue 40  006ns    gt  Copy To Multi Wi
111. as the rotation speed     Medium Normal Quick  MO  128 MB  Approx  10 min Approx  15s  MO  230 MB  Approx  10 min Approx  15 s    External HDD  1 GB  Approx  10 min Approx  15s The time varies depending on the  external hard disk   Internal HDD Approx  5 min Approx  15 s    Setting the partitions  You can set partitions on the external SCSI device and on the internal hard disk   You can create between one and five partitions     Listing the information about the medium   The following information is listed for the selected medium   e Media Name   Name of the medium   e Media Size   Total capacity   e Used Space   Used space   e Vacant Space   Free space   e Partition Size   Number of partitions    Precautions on formatting   e Formatting a medium containing data erases the data completely    e The time it takes to format a floppy disk is approximately one and a half minutes   e A floppy disk cannot be formatted if it is write protected    e Never format when the instrument is connected to a PC via a SCSI cable     Note   e Floppy disks having a format other than the ones listed above cannot be used    e If an error message appears after the format operation  the floppy disk may be damaged    e Disks formatted to MS DOS format on a PC can also be used    e The logical  Quick  format only clears the directory entry and FAT information  If you need to  check for bad tracks  do a physical format  Normal     e When data are written to an external SCSI device that has bad tracks  a
112. asurement  Press the START STOP key to stop the measurement  The measurement indicator  turns off   When measuring once  Press the SINGLE key  The measurement stops automatically after making one  measurement  The measurement indicator lights while the measurement is in progress  and turns off when the measurement completes   Explanation    Continuous measurement  Once the measurement is started  it continues until the START STOP key is pressed  again     Single measurement  A single measurement is made every time the SINGLE key is pressed     Note   e One set of measurements is called one block  see section 1 5   However  when using block  sampling   1 block x the number of blocks  is one set of measurements    e Ifthe START STOP key is pressed in the middle of a measurement block and the  measurement is aborted  the measured data are acquired up to that point and the  measurement stops    e There are input indicators for CHA and CHB above the input terminals  If this indicator is not  blinking  the signal may not be entering the instrument  Check the trigger level setting  see  section 6 6   the cable connection  and the signal source  If the signal is properly entering the  input terminal of the instrument  but the CHA CHB input indicator is not blinking  then there  may be a malfunction  Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer to have it fixed     IM 704310 01E 4 1    suoieiad  C oiseg  gt        4 2 Setting Numerical Values and Strings    Procedure    Entering a numerical v
113. at the entire  data     Setting the display area of the panorama display  Area Min Area Max    You can set the range of the panorama display  The following ranges are available   Area Min   0 300 600 900 ns  1 2 1 5 1 8 2 1 2 4 2 7 3 3 3 us   Area Max   300 600 900 ns  1 2 1 5 1 8 2 1 2 4 2 7 3 3 3 3 6 us    Setting the range of the zoom display   You can set the range to zoom display  size of the zoom box   The following ranges are  available    1 5 3 7 5 15 30 60 150 300 600 ns  1 5 3 6 us    Moving the zoom position    You can set which section  zoom position  of the data in the panorama display for which  to display zoomed     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    8 4 Displaying the Panorama Display    Adjustment function   This function is used to move the zoom box to the center of the panorama window such  as when the zoom box is outside the panorama window    When the zoom box is outside the panorama window  the following marker is displayed  in the panorama window          A section of the zoom box extends beyond the right end of the panorama display    gt      The zoom box is beyond the right end of the panorama display     lt 4    A section of the zoom box extends beyond the left end of the panorama display    lt    The zoom box is beyond the left end of the panorama display     Note    Changing the size or position of the zoom window also changes the  X Center  and  X Span     values of the SCALE key     Spo  Weibo sipy BeMpPJeH 34  UI S  NS9Y ps ej NndjeDg painsesjyy 
114. auto window function cannot be used for inter symbol interference analysis  However   you can determine the scale value beforehand by using the auto window function in the  hardware histogram mode and then copy the scale to the multi window  In this way  you can  perform the analysis using the appropriate scale value    e Ifthe polarity is changed or the measurement function is set to some function other than  pulse width measurement while using the inter symbol interference analysis function  the  inter symbol interference analysis function turns OFF     IM 704310 01E       9 2 Setting the Conditions for Data Extraction     For a functional description  see 1 8      Procedure  Selecting the extraction mode  1  Turn ON the inter symbol interference analysis function and display the inter   symbol interference analysis function setting menu according to steps 1 through 8  on page 9 1   2  Press the  Mode  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  Single    Combination   or  Between      Selecting the polarity of mark and space  3  Press the  Polarity  soft key to select whether spaces will be positive  1   or  marks will be positive           YOKOGAWA 1996 16 29 09 07 14  TimeStamp Pulse Width Are Event 16066 Interval   6us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   ChA  1 600Y Che  1 666   Histo ran Allaselected Mark  Combi  i  Trig  Cot3T   gt  S  3T  Next Co             Ave   ns   Al1  Olns10A11  CALL    Ave   ns  iel  Dins 1  Sel   Sel   114 4675 3 9475 1526 114 6775 3 65
115. available     AC   The signal is input through a capacitor  This setting is used to remove the DC  component from the input signal in order to measure just the amplitude of a signal or a  signal riding on top of a certain DC voltage     Input terminal         DC  The signal is input directly to the amplifier  This setting is used when measuring both the  AC and DC components of a signal        Input terminal  O     See 6 6 for the operating procedures    To reduce attenuation and distortion of the measurement signal  the input impedance of  CHA and CHB of the instrument can be selected so that it matches the output  impedance of the signal source  The available settings are 50 Q and 1 MQ     scien      1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured    Trigger Mode Trigger Level  See 6 6 for the operating procedures   When measuring one sample  you can select the level at which the measurement is to  be carried out  trigger condition   The level at which to activate the trigger is called the  trigger level     Manual trigger  The trigger level is set to the value that is specified using the rotary knob or the  numerical keys     Single auto trigger   Taking the maximum and minimum values of the input signal during the first  measurement block to be 100  and 0   respectively  the trigger level is set to the  specified percentage level  The trigger level for all following blocks is set to this level     Repeat auto trigger   Taking the maximum and minimum values 
116. b  Moves along the digits   e When using the keyboard  Moves the cursor in the string input section     Note   e You can reset the numerical values to their factory default values  For details  see section  13 1  However  be careful  because all values are reset    When using the numerical keys   e Even if you try to set numbers beyond the resolution of each item  they are cut off    e If you try to set a value that exceeds the maximum value or a value that falls short of the  minimum value  they are set to the maximum and minimum values  respectively    When using the keyboard   e You can use the keyboard along with the numerical keys  The numerical keys that can be  used are as follows    0 to 9     ENTER  RESET key  keyboard   s CLR operation    e Upper and lower case letters are not distinguished for file names  Comments distinguish  them  In addition  the following five file names cannot be used due to the limitation of MS   DOS    AUX  CON  PRN  NUL  CLOCK   e When using the GP IB interface commands to enter a file name  the following symbols that do   not exist on the keyboard of this instrument can be used     l              4 3    suoieiadoC oiseg  gt        4 3 The Way to Look at the Soft Key Menu Using  the Rotary Knob and Select Key    The way to look at the soft key menu   A  Pressing this soft key causes a menu to pop up         You can set the value using both the numerical keys and the rotary knob        You can set the value or select the setting item using t
117. cancbbed dud ccemeectartedeidnstlecaceesdecdeasedend Seaceueade 7 5  Displaying Ine Statis eS isa a te ceeds ee ase eee 7 7  Displaying the Panorama DISplay wie  es ie a ere ent ete ene a 7 9  Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters  Calc Stat              cccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 7 12  Ghrangind  the Scale Value sorei tee et eal oe oie cal tate nec asl eee lerc inant  7 15  Reading the Dla onasan eee ee eee eee eee eee 7 17    Displaying the Measured Calculated Results in the Hardware  Histogram Mode    JISDIAV ING INS TAS TOON ANN ae a a E 8 1  US VLC WEN Uae cess ae cateisa a a aa 8 3  Displaying tHe Statis OS npo nr se chan acre a ae eee eed ole 8 5  Displaying the Panorama Display texcxs eisai ise taco cae cee odes accel ease adivd eae ieee ede ieee co eeee ante  8 7  Using the Multi  Window FUNCION wieibcccsecccnescniiatihds EA A 8 10  Using the Auto WNaow FUNCION cain a 8 13  Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters  Calc Stat             cccccccccccccceseeseeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 8 16  Changing the Scale Value secs  scsimeenticcei teed te edhenscasedccaccei deeds ses Rena haceiea rations eles 8 18  Reading the Dalal cavesici  dese iiss on lereoni vee alee ence eds elena eee 8 20    Using the Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function  Option     Using the Inter symbol Interference Analysis FUNCTION             ccccccssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 9 1  Setting the Conditions for Data Extraction es si sesee5eec ccctewcscacboc
118. coloring and deformation     IM 704310 01E       3 2 Installing the Instrument       AN    To avoid the possibility of fire  never use the instrument with the rear side facing  down  as the cooling vents will be obstructed  Placing the instrument with the rear  side down can cause a fire when the instrument malfunctions  If you must use the  instrument in this position  place a metal plate or a flame resistive barrier  grade  UL94 1 or higher  beneath the instrument            sM       Installation condition  Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions   Ambient temperature and humidity  Use the instrument in the following environment   Ambient temperature  5 to 40  C  For highly accurate measurements  the temperature should be 232  C   Ambient humidity  20 to 80 RH  no condensation   For highly accurate measurements  the humidity should be 50 10      Note  Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the  ambient temperature and humidity are higher  or if the temperature changes rapidly  In this  case  let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the  instrument     Well ventilated location  Vent holes are located on the top and bottom of the instrument  In addition  vent holes  for the cooling fan are located on the rear  To prevent internal overheating  allow enough    space around the instrument  see the figure below  and do not block the vent holes   LLLLILLLILLLL  
119. crolled   e Resolution of time stamps  100 ns  When the sampling interval is other than 0 us  it is 1 us     List display  during hardware histogram mode  Lists the measured values  histogram class values  and frequencies  The displayed data can be scrolled     Statistics display  during time stamp mode  When calculating statistics on a histogram  Statistical parameters  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Peak Peak  o  o Average  o T  E L Error   MELE  Median  Mode  and Number  When calculating statistics on time variation data  Statistical parameters  T Average  T Maximum  T Minimum  T Peak Peak  T o  T o Average  T  P   P Average   T RF  and T Num  Statistics display  during hardware histogram mode    Statistical parameters  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Peak Peak  o  o Average  o T  E L Error   MELE  Median  Mode  and Number       15 6 Auto Window Function    Item Specification  Auto window function A function in which the window size  scale  and area are automatically configured by measuring  the T value and considering the modulation method   Modulation method EFM modulation  EFM modulation  and 1 7 modulation  T Value calculation method Measured T  Automatically measure the value of the constant T from the clock input signal of  CHB  Estimated T  Estimate the value of the constant T from the input signal and the modulation  method    Operating conditions Measured T  CHB input 1025 cycles or more  Estimated T  Data rate 43 MS s or less  sampling rate 1 6 s or less  T measurement ra
120. ct  2DD 640K    2DD 720K    2HD 1 2M   or  2HD  1 44M            a Function fa    Format          NN GEE    Setting the format type and partition  for SCSI devices only     Press the  Format  soft key   Press the  Format Type  soft key to select  Normal  or  Quick    Turn the rotary knob to set the number of partitions           ornat             F  wPartitionFormatType    a Function fa zZ Quick   Exec            es ee  H                 esc  _    L    ML JL     11 5    Jd  amp  0  BuljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hbulaes 2    11 5 Formatting the Disk    Explanation    Executing the format operation  8  Press the  Exec  soft key       Format    BFD Forna  a Function ja 2HD 1 44M   Exec    Fornat edia Info   LT JE JE JE IL IL  CO    9  The Alert   menu is displayed  Turning the rotary knob to select  OK  and pressing  the SELECT key executes the format operation             Select  Execute  Really     FDO will be formatted by 2HD 1 44M format          OK   Cancel    Canceling the format operation  9  The Alert   menu is displayed  Turning the rotary knob to select  Cancel  and  pressing the SELECT key cancels the format operation     Looking at the information about the medium  10  Pressing the  Media Info  soft key lists the information about the media that is  highlighted        CAUTION    e Never remove the disk or turn OFF the power while the format operation is in  progress  while the access indicator is blinking   It can damage the medium or  destroy the data on the medium
121. cy   10 MHz     20 MHz     40 MHz  e Level   35 mVrms    IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    Test method    14 6 Executing the Performance Test    e Test the TA520 after a warm up time of 30 minutes     e Set the frequency of the 8657B to the values given in the table below  and check that    the measured values  mean value and standard deviation  are within the allowable  range using the period measurement function on the TA520  Perform the same test  on both CHA and CHB     Test results  CHAT    Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz  40 MHz  CHA    Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz  40 MHz  CHBT    Frequency  8657B     10 MHz  20 MHz  40 MHz    CHBY  Frequency  8657B   10 MHz    20 MHz  40 MHz    Mean Value  Measured Value    Mean Value  Measured Value    Mean Value  Measured Value    Mean Value  Measured Value    Standard Deviation    Allowable Range Measured Value  99 7 ns to 100 3 ns    49 7 ns to 50 3 ns  24 7 ns to 25 3 ns    Allowable Range    280 ps or less  190 ps or less  140 ps or less    Standard Deviation    Allowable Range Measured Value  99 7 ns to 100 3 ns    49 7 ns to 50 3 ns  24 7 ns to 25 3 ns    Allowable Range    280 ps or less  190 ps or less  140 ps or less    Standard Deviation    Allowable Range Measured Value  99 7 ns to 100 3 ns    49 7 ns to 50 3 ns  24 7 ns to 25 3 ns    Allowable Range    280 ps or less  190 ps or less  140 ps or less    Standard Deviation    Allowable Range Measured Value  99 7 ns to 100 3 ns    49 7 ns to 50 3 ns  24 7 ns to 25
122. d  be distributed   Indicates the offset of the measured average value with respect to XcenTER     E L Error Average X center    e Maximum Effect Error  MELE for short  only for histograms   Indicates the offset of the measured average value with respect to Xcenter in terms  of a percentage of the value T     Average   X  MELE   2 ee 00       1 15    1 6 Analysis and Calculation    Median  only for histograms   Indicates the median of the histogram   Median  il Median  Mode  only for histograms   Indicates the class value with the highest frequency of occurrence  most frequent  value    Mode  i  Mode  T  P P Average   Indicates the spread in the Peak to Peak values in terms of a percentage of the  average value   P P   T  P P Average             Average    T RF  only for time variation    Calculates the average value of T  P P Average  of all blocks that were block  sampled    N is the total number of blocks  P Pk is the Peak to Peak value of each block  and    AVEK is the average value of each block   N    TRF  Y    N amp    AVE        P P                  x100    During the hardware histogram mode   In the equation below  n is the number of bins in the histogram  A bin of a histogram  refers to a bar that indicates the frequency of occurrence on the histogram  Xi is the  class value of each bin of the histogram  Depending on the span setting of the X axis   the interval width of each bin becomes 25 ps in which case Xi becomes the measured  value  For details  see section 1 
123. d OFF  the warning message is recorded to the error log if  a warning occurs   e Regardless of its ON OFF setting  clicks no longer sound  if the beep sound is turned OFF     IM 704310 01E    Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and Maintenance    14 1 Troubleshooting       For corrective actions when a message appears on the screen  see section 14 2     Messages       If servicing is required or if the instrument does not operate properly after taking the  following corrective actions  contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer     Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Reference Sections  The power does not turn The source voltage is outside of the Use a proper voltage source  3 3  ON  allowed range   The fuse is blown  Check for the cause  andifthere 14 7  is no problem replace it with a new  fuse   Nothing is displayed  The screen brightness is set Adjust the brightness of the LCD 13 5  extremely dark  monitor   The screen is extremely cold  The ambient temperature should be      5  C or higher   The display is odd  The system is not operating properly  Reboot the instrument       Keys do not operate  The instrument is in remote mode  Set it to local mode  i  Cannot make Incorrect trigger level  Set a proper trigger level  6 6  measurements  Measurement channel is not selected  Check the channel  5 2 to 5 4  Exceeding measurement range  Check the measurement range  5 2 to 5 4  Incorrect arming setting  Check the arming setting  6 4  Incorrect inhibit setting  Check the inhibit setting 
124. damage the  internal circuitry        Check that this instrument and the DL1500 Series Oscilloscopes are turned OFF  Then    connect them as shown below    1  Use a BNC cable to connect the monitor output terminal on the rear panel of the  instrument  for CHA and CHB  and the input terminal of the DL1500 Series  oscilloscope    2  Connect the BNC connector of the probe that you are calibrating to the input terminal  of the instrument    3  Connect the other end of the probe to the CAL signal output terminal of the DL1500  Series oscilloscope  and the grounding wire to the functional grounding terminal     MONITOR OUT terminal  BNC cable          DL1540    50Q terminator  Input terminal          CAL signal output terminal    i correction hole    So Function grounding terminal          IM 704310 01E    Procedure    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    3 6 Calibrating the Probe  Performing Phase Correction     1    Turn ON this instrument and the DL1500 Series oscilloscope    2  Set the waveform acquisition conditions on the DL1500 Series oscilloscope so that  approximately two periods of the waveform are displayed clearly on the screen   For the procedures  see the User   s Manual for the DL1500 Series    3  Insert a screwdriver into the probe s phase correction hole and turn the variable  capacitor so that the displayed waveform on the monitor becomes a proper square  wave  see explanation      Necessity of probe phase correction   If the input capacitance of the probe is not withi
125. de as follows     During the time stamp mode   The list and time variation for each measurement block can be displayed and statistical  calculations can be performed    The maximum selectable block size  number of repetitions  N  is 100     During the hardware histogram mode   An histogram of all measurement blocks can be displayed and statistical calculations can  be performed on them  Lists and statistical calculations on each block are not allowed   The maximum selectable block size  number of repetitions  N  is 1000     The relationship between the pause time and arming during block sampling is shown  below     For Arming  Ext with arming delay  pause time  OFF    ___Arming delay Arming delay  External arming     inputsignal   LJ LJ LI LJ LI LI LI LILI LI LILI EI LILI LI  See ae See oe ae Se    S1 S2 S3        2  3    Measurement start   Measurement start    For Arming  Ext no arming delay  pause time  enabled         Arming delay   Arming delay  External arming                1stblock _  Pausetime _    2nd block  Input signal  S1 S2 S3   S1 S2 S3    Measurement start     Measurement start  For Arming  Auto  pause time  OFF  1st block 2nd block   3rd block  Input signal  NO A A A S A A S A A S WOU  S1 S2 9S3 S1 S2 S3 S1 S2 S3  For Arming  Auto  pause time  enabled  1st block Pause time   2nd block Pause time   3rd block  Input signal re Le a ee La Se a Le  a a i  an    ar een  eee tN JN ef  S1 S2 9S3   S1 S2 9S3   S1 S2 9S3    IM 704310 01E 1 7    mais      1 5 Acquisitio
126. details  see section 15 1     Selecting the input coupling  Select either AC or DC  The frequency characteristics vary depending on the input  coupling  For details  see section 15 1     Selecting the trigger mode   Select from the following choices       Manual   Trigger using the specified trigger level  voltage     e SingleAuto   Determines the trigger level from the value     specified on the first  measurement after the measurement is started    e RepeatAuto  Determines the trigger level from the value     specified for each  measurement     Setting the trigger level    Selectable range  when the trigger mode is Manual       5 V to  5 V  in 1  mV steps    Selectable range  when the trigger mode is SingleAuto RepeatAuto    O to 100   in 1   steps     However  if you selected Arming Gate or Inhibit for the channel  you will select from TTL   1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   and O V     Note  The input impedance of EXT ARM EXT GATE and INHIBIT is fixed to 1 MQ     IM 704310 01E       6 7 Inputting Outputting the Reference Signal     For a functional description  see 1 5      Procedure  Selecting the reference clock  1  Press the SAMPLE key to display the Sample menu   2  Press the  Ref Clock  soft key to select  Int  or  Ext      YOKOGAWA 1996 61 01 16 14 29  TineStamp Tinelnterval ATBL Event 10000 Interval   us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600Y ChE  1 600    T Average     T Maximum    F  i l i ii    nii  ij    xz  390 0us AX  126 6us T Num     UJ  sec UZ  wae A
127. ding sampling pulse  P1  P2  P3  to PN  that occurs  according to the specified sampling interval  see the section on sampling interval given  later      When the period of the input signal is longer than the sampling interval    Preparation  1 block for measurement 1 block    inposigngl IL eee a      S1 S2 S3 SN S1 S2 S3  Si   oe oo Pha    z Pia Adi      3      a pe Pika  Sampling meee    Been see cee oa see wer  pulse PI P2   P3  P4 Dy    P2 P3 P4  Sampling interval    When the period of the input signal is shorter than the sampling interval    Preparation  1 block for measurement 1 block    Data processing     display Measurement block    Measurement block    Input signal   _ ILLFLSTLTLILILILILIULIS SUL        UUUUUUUUUUUUU  L L LI LJ L LJ LI LJ  S1 S2  3 SA SN S1 S2  3 S4  M M i   s PA M a a a   Sampling 1 1 r r r 1   r i   pulse Pi P2 P3 P4 PN P1 P2 P3 P4       k Sampling interval    IM 704310 01E    1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured    Block Sampling  See 6 3 for the operating procedures   The single measurement block explained above can be repeated N times  Repetitively  measuring    one measurement block    N times is called block sampling   In block sampling  data processing and display are done after measuring all N blocks of  data  Also  in block sampling  you can set a pause time  defined as the period of time  between block measurements   The display and analysis of data that has been block sampled varies depending on the  sampling mo
128. display the Calculation   Statistics Setting menu     For histogram display   Setting the statistical calculation area   3   Turnthe rotary knob to select the  Calculation Area  item   4  Press the SELECT key to select  Window  or  Marker      Setting the constant T   5  Turnthe rotary knob to select the  T Value  item    6  Press the SELECT key to display the numerical input box and enter the value using  the numerical keys     Selecting the statistical parameters to calculate  7  Use the rotary knob to select the buttons under  Statistics  and press the SELECT    key to check them   Selecting  All Clear  and pressing the SELECT key removes all the checks     YOKOGAWA 1998 61 02 16 05 26  TineStamp Period At Event 10000 Interval Gus  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  1 600Y ChE  1 600 Blocksize 1 Rest0ff   I       Calculation Statistics sett ing          Calculation Area Window  __Marker_        T Value 38  G06ns    statistics       Average    Peak   Peak  dT    fo  dvAverage  MELE    a   o  E L Error   fo  Median  0  Mode    All Clear    4    1       a Iten fe ra   Histogram Style CalcrStat   esc  JL JE JEJE JE JL 4     Selecting the calculation polarity  only for A  B t  A  B   and   gt  gt   8  Tum the rotary knob to select the  Calculation Slope   Calculation Polarity  item   9  Press the SELECT key to select one        IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    7 6 Setting the Statistical Calculation Parameters  Calc Stat     For time variation display 
129. e  1 to 1000    Setting the pause time   Select from the following choices    OFF   No pause time   RestTime  Set the pause time in units of time  1 0u s to 1 0000000 s  in 100 ns steps    RestEvent   Set the pause time by specifying the number of events  1 to 1000000    Note  e Block sampling is not possible when external gate is selected or when the inter symbolic  interference analysis function is being used   e When the pause time is set using the number of events and the pause time is less than 500  ns  it is set to 500 ns     IM 704310 01E       6 4 Setting the Arming Source  Slope  and Delay     For a functional description  see 1 5      Procedure  1    Press the SAMPLE key to display the Sample menu     Displaying the arming menu  2  Press the  Arming  soft key to display the Arming menu  When external gate is  selected the arming menu is not displayed  the ARMING soft key is not displayed      YOKOGAWA 1998 61 01 16 14 29  TineStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 10000 Interval ous  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600 ChE  1 600       OAA t ciussebstdecetvekeulevevecussiveasteehsiesorse  cs   TeAuerage    ee Maximum    270  0uUs  X1  270 0us K2  390 0us AX  126 6us  U1  meee DO mE 1 mE    Y1   17  400nz Ye  32 600ns dY  56 600ns  __                                             S    I                                 a Gate  ode f   Events izgi nterval fa re Inhibit f Ref  Clock  Event 10000 ous   Arming Block PFF A   Ext  Ep J ML IL ICI    Selecting the arming
130. e Stamp  Ous 100 ns  1Tustols 1 us    IM 704310 01E       6 3 Performing Block Sampling     For a functional description  see 1 5      Procedure  1  Press the SAMPLE key to display the Sample menu   2  Press the  Block  soft key to display the Block Sample menu     BLOCK NUMBER 16 1998716729 09 40 45   TimeStamp Pulse Width AHU Event 1606 Interval   6uUs   Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Cha  6 600 Cha  6 000 Blocksize 10 RestTine_1 6006nms  Panorana       re on cee SEET T average     49  7   I      T  Maxi imn       1 1606ns  M1  1 1448ms XZ  1 2200ns AX  75 2us T Nun  1000  Yi  49 712n5 UZ  sxe AU  sexs  Y1  40 175ns Ye  30 67M  AY  2 500ns    EEE  eae  a Gate  ode   gEventsizefea Interval fa re Inhibit f Ref  Clock  Event 1000 ous   Arming Block FF  A   Ext       es  _Jl JL JL JEL IL I    Performing block sampling  3  Press the  Mode  soft key and select  ON      Set the number of blocks   4  Press the  BlockSize  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the number of measurement  blocks     Select the pause mode  5  Press the  RestMode  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the pause mode from  OFF    Time   and  Event               Y1   17 406ns Ye  32 6061    a Gatehode  fREventsize aoe  P  P   LT JTL IL Ee ee Ee Ld    e When the pause mode is set to Time  6  Press the  RestTime  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the pause time     Y1   17 406ns Ye  32 6061    Block Sample  pore tab lacas izd jResthode  OFF OFF 
131. e around which the measured data would  be distributed    Indicates the offset of the actually measured average value with respect to  XCENTER     E L Error Average X center  Maximum Effect Length Error  MELE for short   Indicates the offset of the measured average value with respect to Xcenter in  terms of a percentage of the value T     E  Average   X center      MELE     S 00      Median   Indicates the median of the histogram    Median   Xj  edian   Mode   Indicates the class value with the highest frequency of occurrence  most frequent  value     Mode   X     Mode    sau         1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results    Histogram Display  See 7 1 and 8 1 for the operating procedures     By displaying the histogram  frequency distribution  of the measured data  you can see  the data distribution  You can manually set the X axis  time  and Y axis  frequency  of  the histogram  You can also have them set automatically using the auto scale function   The following items can be set    e The center value of the X axis  X Center    e The X axis width  X Span    e The scaling format of the Y axis  select linear scale or log scale    e The maximum Y axis value  Y High     Frequency distribution   The histogram is displayed according to the settings made for the above values  Ifa  class has a time span  the average value will be used as the class value  For example  if  the minimum and maximum values in a class are 505 ns and 515 ns  respectively  510  ns will be treated a
132. e cee Re ee i er oe nO Pe Se 1 24  8 14  Measurement FUNCTIONS             cccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeees 1 5  Measurement Channel             ccccecceeseecceecsueeeeeeueeeueeenes 5 2  5 6  Measurement range          cccsseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2  5 3  5 6  Montor OUIDUL awe ee ee ae 1 25  13 5  Multi window function             ccccceceesseeseeeeeeesneseeeeeeeanaseeeeees 1 23  man WINDOW care a et Coie 1 22  MaKe Mente eee tire Clete ee scien te a Mee hee ne eer on en ne eee ere 9 5  marker eseria a bc aoe TEO EEE 1 13  7 19  8 21  measurement DIOCK crcranronen iaaa 1 6  measurement results           ccceeecececceessseeeeceeeeeseeeecesneseeess 11 12  memory MUM ON arassa N A NTE 10 1  mMmeSSaAgOS irra asa eS  14 2  ModuUlaNO nce a E 8 14  Movable Nolder arkka 12 2  MuUlti WINAOW 0    ec ccccccce ccc eeceecseeeueeeuceueeeueeeueeuueeneeenes 1 23  8 10  N   NOAL srne ast sar ces Ses alec ecoet ar a auecee ceed 11 7  ICI es EEEE EE PESE E A E aeaan te E TE rs ae 1 13  NUMBER a a 8 6  numerncal KEY Sesadon re O a eA E 4 2  O   Output data formatida 12 8    Index 2    DV EMA eee a e E aphtadlndsiaistbacudan 7 2  8 2  optional ACCCSSONSS  sassi a nude  lil  P   Panorama display ss sissssssssessansouninans 1 22  7 10  8 8  PADC RICCO iie a aia enubeencim rie omielnbeeaeodeantes 12 5  PANUINON    cesceeacnatos acenoscenacsnaam N 11 7  Period Measurement             ccccceecceeseeeceeeeeeeeeeneeseueeeeens 1 5  5 2  POWER SWIC renn ana 3 6  PINUNO eese or A E 12 4  
133. e m SS a ae     Mode cea an ne So E7 ag T  d orr onbinatio ba Hext        O O O a a    When the extraction mode is set to Between  Selecting the trigger  4  Press the  Trigger  soft key to select O O or         Selecting the window to that will activate the trigger  5  Press the window setting soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the window to that will activate the trigger        ISI  lt   5pace Se  Hark    Hode A  rier a  epee eee Pe     oOo ee    Selecting the parameters to list  7  Press the  Calc Stat  soft key to display the Calculation Statistics Setting menu   8  Use the rotary knob and the SELECT key to check the statistical parameters to list                 9 4 IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    9 2 Setting the Conditions for Data Extraction    Selecting the extraction mode   Select from the following choices    e Single   Uses either a space or a mark as the trigger and analyzes the data  around it    e Combination   Uses the sequence of a space followed by a mark or a mark followed  by a space as the trigger and analyzes the data around it    e Between   When a mark or a Space exists between two spaces or two marks it is  considered to be a trigger and the data between them are analyzed     Selecting the polarity  Select whether spaces will be positive     or marks will be positive         Selecting the trigger Selecting the data to be extracted   You can select which mark or space will be used as the trigger  The types of trigger that  can be 
134. e outlet   never pull the cord itself  Always hold the plug and pull it  If the power cord is  damaged  contact your dealer for replacement  Refer to page 2 for the part number  when placing an order           3 1    sjusWwainseeyy Bunes a10jog o    3 1 Precautions on the Use of the instrument    General Handling Precautions    Never place any objects containing water on top of the instrument  This may cause  problems    Do not apply shock or vibration to the instrument  It can lead to malfunction  Take  extra care when dealing with the internal floppy disk drive and the internal hard disk   option   because they are prone to shock and vibrations  In addition  applying shock  to the input terminal or the connected cable can cause electrical noise to enter the  instrument    Do not bring charged objects near the input output terminals  This can damage the  instrument    When the instrument is not being used for an extended period of time  unplug the  power cord from the outlet    When carrying the instrument  be sure to first disconnect the power and measurement  cables  The instrument weighs 5 kg  To carry the instrument  use the handle as  shown in the figure below  and move it carefully        Be careful not to scratch the surface of the LCD with sharp objects  It can lead to  malfunction    When cleaning the case or the operation panel  first remove the power cord from the  outlet  Then  wipe with a dry  soft cloth  Do not use volatile chemicals since this might  cause dis
135. e scale and marker values of each window          Select the window to display in the main window  Window span value  scale value     Selecting the window mode   The following three window modes are available    e Single   Use this mode when analyzing the data on one window    e Multi   You can set multiple windows of different sizes  Use this mode when there  are multiple histograms and the value of the constant T is known    e Auto   Automatically determines the value of T according to the input data and sets  the window size  Use this mode when there are multiple histograms and the  value of the constant T is not fixed  CDs of CAV format  for example  or when  the constant T cannot be determined  For auto window  see section 8 6        Setting the window size  Sets the number of windows   Selectable range   1 to 16    Constant T  Sets the interval between the center value of each window  T value    Selectable range   1 ns to 250 ns  in 25 ps steps     Updating the window   Reflects the value of the constant T to the Center  Span  Left Marker  and Right Marker  values of each window    The values are reflected in the following way    Center   T x  Label    Span   A window width closest to but larger than the value T   Left Marker   Center    T 2    Right Marker   Center  T 2     Example lf T   38 ns and the Label of Window1 is 3  then the X axis settings are as  follows   Center 38x3 114 ns   Span 38  lt 60  60 ns   Left Marker 114   38 2 95  ns   Right Marker 114 38 2 133 
136. e soft key changes to  All Reset    If you press the  All Reset  key  the     marks  disappear     11 21    Jd  amp  0  buljoouUO0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hbulaes 2    11 10 Copying Files    Selecting the destination medium and directory  9  Press the  Dest Dir  soft key to display the File List and Copy menu   Mark the files to be copied    i 1998710723 09 13 37  Harduare Hist Pulse Width Aw Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int     1 0  00V ChE  6  606Y    Event 166066  Auto Arming       Panorama      File List  tath   FDO  fpace 541184 byte m      File Name Size Date y     Fi     secs   DVD DC61   WWF 399012 1998 61 05 07 08             File attributes             DUD DC6z   WWF  DVD DDG1   WWF    65704  138626    1996 61 05 67 11  1998 01 05 07 01    HH_PER  WWF 130626  1998710721 18 12  TS_BLK1  WUF 65764 1998710721 18 62          X1  95 660ns    Copy     a Function    r     Copy fet nese   All Set   Property   ttr   Dest Dir    A2  133 666ns AX  30  060ns          SI  nm lt i    10  Select the destination medium and directory according to the steps given in     Selecting the directory in which to save the information    in 11 6     Copying the files  11  Pressing the  Copy Exec  soft key copies the files              Path   SCS       Path   FDO Space 1359360 byte  space 1359560 b File Nane Size     FDO     sch   DVD DC61   WWF  DUD Cez2   WWF    DUD DDG1  WUF  HH_FER  WWF  TS_BLK1  WUF                       lt TA5Z   gt    lt YAMA  gt       1998716715 17 16 Re    1990 0
137. e succes hee 1 4  5 1  Tugger MOG n E tarecccealicated partes 1 12  11 a   ene eect a ra entra ae ier ee ne ieee Se eRe 3 10  TOO CMICVGl  rerni a a 1 12  6 14  U   Updating the WINdOW                   cccscecseeeeeseneneseeentnseeenseenenes 8 11  W   Warning messages ssiecivedeaneien eee ures 14 2  WVIGOWG NUNN sscacschs ace ca cneren A eee A eceeaete a Leases eat het  8 12  Warning CISDIAY eieo a rA 13 8  WINO MOGE ssia Sdennienlniceaewndn east ea samieediaads 8 11  WITIC OW SIZ    ae facncnctaacecd c aire i fedeenceanaeenences 8 11  Z   ZOOM O OK Mehr echelon cesta tint etiam tian abe Be as od 1 22  2 4  8 8  ZOOM SDN aere e a EAE ocdabocteds 7 10  8 8    IM 704310 01E    Index    x  pul    Index 3 Index    
138. eas decciovecectetieccteece Mesbiacnsnecdioeeeenegae 9 3  ANANSI EXAMP IE ase catisca tien aA baton sees duane ttauaenemoneicarntcasndewexieantea teaeeuncdaones 9 6   Ix    Contents    Chapter 10  10 1  10 2    Chapter 11  11 1   A 11 2  11 3   11 4   11 5   11 6   11 7   11 8   11 9   11 10   11 11   11 12    Chapter 12  12 1  12 2  12 3    Chapter 13  13 1   13 2   A 133  13 4   13 5    Chapter 14  14 1  14 2  14 3  14 4  14 5  14 6  14 7  14 8     gt  e  amp     Chapter 15  15 1  15 2  15 3  15 4  15 5  15 6  15 7  15 8    Storing Recalling Setup Information from the Internal Memory  Storing the Setup Information to the Internal Memory            ccccceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 10 1  Recalling Setup Information from the Internal Memory                cccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeas 10 2    Saving and Loading Data and Connecting to a PC    RIOD OV DISKS seed cad oes cen A can te od ttenctu dt ata edeeh atuenectosstetencuautad 11 1  Internal  Hard  DISkK ODUION  renren a A e aa 11 2  CONNecinNg SCSI  DeVICCS masia esc ce vate ddac cheeses eae coe 11 3  Changing the SCS ID  NUMDGEP i  veses eres sec eecocctied och oes ces aa eeenne scence t a A 11 4  Formatting THENDISK seien a ae diesel ueecduedasuaseaescoane oc aestea sateen tances 11 5  Saving and Loading Setup Information   c     ccc c ccccs ccc scciececccceessccecesevdandectecnecccceteeeeweeeeecennctedes 11 8  Saving and Loading the Measurement Results              ccccccceccssssseeeeeeceeeeee
139. ecting the items for which to calculate the statistics  Stat Item   Select from the following choices   e Hist  Set the range over which to calculate the statistics with the measured values  and frequencies   e T V    Set the range over which to calculate the statistics with the time stamps and  measured values     Setting the display format  Style    For data that were block sampled  if the statistical calculation area is  Block  and the item   for which to calculate the statistics is set to time variation  T V    then the display format   of the statistics can be selected from the following choices    e All    Lists the statistics of all blocks  Up to four statistical parameters and up to 20  blocks can be displayed at once  Rotary knobs can be used on the  AW  and    lt 4  keys to scroll through the blocks and statistical parameters    e Block  Displays the statistics for each block  All statistical parameters can be  displayed at once     Statistical parameters that are calculated  The following statistical parameters are calculated   The items inside parentheses are displayed when  T V   is selected     e Average  T Average  e E L Error  None    e Maximum  T Maximum  e MELE  None    e Minimum  T Minimum  e Median  None    e Peak Peak  T Peak Peak  e Mode  None    e 6  T o  e     T  P P Average    e o Average  T  o Average   e     T RF       o T  None  e Number  T Num     Asterisks     are displayed for the statistics of the parameters that are not turned ON in  the dialo
140. ed for each test item  the instrument is malfunctioning        1998712707 66 20 63  Hardware Hist Period At Event 106 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  68 600  Chi  6 000          selftest     lt  Board Test  gt   CPU Board Test  AcqUIiSition1 Board Test  Acquisition   Board Test  Interface Board Test  Measure Board Test  Multiplexer Board Test   Board Test         selftest AX  366  660ns             Esc   _  C  E IL JIL  oo    14 6 IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    14 4 Performing a Self test    Remove all cables that are connected to the terminals on the front and rear panels and  stop the measurement     If abnormalities are found on a test item  The instrument probably has malfunctioned  Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer     Board test messages   The following messages may appear  If any of these messages appears  servicing is   necessary  Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer    e Low Battery   The battery has died  It must be replaced    e Calibration Data Lost   The internal calibration values may have been lost  Re   calibration is necessary    e ROM Error DRAM Error   Abnormality may have occurred in the internal memory     SRAM Error    14 7    z soueus UIeWy pue HunooysajqnoIL       14 5 Adjusting the Time Base    A N CAUTION    e Do not apply a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the input  terminals  It can damage the input section    e Do not apply an external voltage to the output terminals  It can damage the
141. ed in the floppy disk drive  11 1  No SCSI device  The SCSI device could not be detected  11 3  Media failure  The medium is abnormal       File not found  The specified file does not exist  Chapter 11  Media is protected  The medium is write protected       Media was removed while The medium was removed while it was being      accessing  accessed   File already exists  A file with the same name already exists       Contains invalid characters  Invalid characters are being used  4 3  Media full  There is not enough free space on the medium  11 11  11 14  11 17  Directory is not empty  The directory is not empty  11 20  File is protected  The file is set to read only  11 20  11 23  Physical format error  The medium could not be physically formatted  11 7  File system failure  The file system is abnormal       File is damaged  The file is damaged    File system failure  The file system is abnormal      No media exists in SCSI device  There is no medium in the SCSI device      Media failure  The medium is abnormal      File system failure  The file system is abnormal      Cannot load this file format  The file was saved on another device        The file cannot be loaded   File is now being accessed  The file is being accessed       Wait a moment  Wait until it finishes   Cannot find  HDR file  There is no  HDR file  11 14  Stop measurement before The file cannot be accessed while the measurement 11 11  11 15  11 17  accessing file  is in progress   Data to be saved do not exist 
142. eee 14 2  Using the Error Logging FUNCTION             cccccsseseeeccceceeeeeeceecaeeeeeeeeceseessececeessaaeeeeeseauaaeeeseesaaagass 14 4  POnOnMinG  a o elleS i 5 areencenttorss csesitodtcadiehns a A 14 5  Adjusting MINE TIME Base rien a a a wens 14 8  Executing the Performance Test                cccccccssscccccesececceesseeceeusececeauseeesseaseeseeaaeeeesseeeeesssaseees 14 10  Replacmg TNE POW CISC ararsa a a E torrets cine ides 14 20  Recommended Replacement Parts            cccccssssseccccecseecececceeeeececeeseesseeeeesesaaseeeeeseeeseeeeeesaas 14 21  Specifications   Measurement Input ANd Trigger              c cscccccsesceeeceeseeccceuseeeceauseeeseueeeeceseueeeessageeeessaseeessenseneess 15 1  Measurement Functions  Measurement Items                 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeseeeessaeeeeeseeneeeeeas 15 2  Gate  Amino  and  bit eteveniayecb cere asi ace a E A atlaniad aioe 15 4  Block Sampling sanen leased ean essed se eecee med heute  Mateo eon A 15 4  DISP AVe pee mle Potente te erent ica or ferent ere eR eer eae eee een nec ee ee eae ere ee 15 5  PAULO  WINDOW  FUNC HON secant abacus ciate ccna ole a a lee cai eC eel 15 6  Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function  Option               c ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeaaes 15 7  RearP anel IMOUl OUIOUE eresie EA Montes  15 7    IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    Contents    199     CAP AIBC ACS nnr ested ce rst ena at at id a ce ala ewe amo era ae Omanlaceauae cuales 15 7  i Fayed Os  Gs  HODIN Ram
143. emory number  3  Turn the rotary knob to select a memory number     Storing  4  Press the  Store  soft key to store the setup information     store Recall Memory    106600006      Nunber  re 14    Store    Recall    Conf ig   Next1 2      es  _J L JL  MML JL JL                    Stored information   The measurement conditions and display parameters set using the following keys are  stored    MODE key  FUNCTION key  SAMPLE key  INPUT key  DISPLAY key  SCALE key   MARKER key    Selecting the memory number   Select from the following numbers  If there is setup information already stored in the  chosen memory number  it is overwritten  the previous information is lost     Oto 9    Note    e Initializing the settings will not clear the stored setup information   e For parameters that are not stored  see page 13 3     10 1    Aowa jeu  BU  WO UOI EWUIOJU  dnyas Huljyjeoay Hul0is E       10 2 Recalling Setup Information from the Internal    Memory    Procedure    Explanation    10 2     For a functional description  see 1 8      1  Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu     2  Press the  Memory  soft key to display the Memory menu     YOKOGAWA 1998 10 23 08 52 43  Hardware Hist Period At Event 100000000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  6 600  Chi  6 600       Histogram    Area  Window  Average 99  9625675ns  Maximum 100 350ns  Minimum 99   606ns  Peak Peak   75 ps  d 77 5900p3       f ons 39 97M  X1  92 47m  x2  107 475ns AX  15 000ns  Yi  6 UZ
144. en ee meme renee er iene mere ne ei re ere er ee eer ae ere rn re nen nnn en ey ee eee ee 15 8  fora Me otc hs  gt  eepreeenr ee nner reer te reerrre ner ee a tener rer E a te rere eeere err 15 8  15 12 Internal Memory FUNGON tsris centers aacesttectan nindedtecanasstetaaee aeia eae e eaire teva aael 15 8  LS ro CS IIIT TY le Mos gen a a teen a a a a a T 15 9  15 14 Built in Floppy Disk DAV Cicassiecha te sade satin icead lt haaytstcucstemnaeresaleascipennadyassniace ddcmatendebaltedamwuassacacenes 15 9  15 15 Internal Hard Disk Drive  Option               ccccccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaesaaaaaseaeaasaseesesssesseseeeeeeees 15 9  15 16 General SpecicatlonS sarind ae roe ee tet ees err ee amen ere eee 15 10  loa  o 4  2d ar  1  9 p21 ao   0  dc eer rere ern rr eee ero cme eter ee eee rere een pe ieee ee eer nen eee ee 15 12  E EAE A oh Se a teed i cera EAE ATE ees SL SAGs cae a tu ee ee A ach E tle ee eae  Index 1  xi    Chapter 1 Functions    1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram       System Configuration        Inhibit input   External arming input    shared with the external gate input   Reference input Agag    oononn  oooo           PC  Remote control  Data collection analysis                                                    Floppy disk  Block Diagram   10MHz   Reference  amp     REFIN     gt  o PLL Clock   L Generator  REF OUT     Ge  V  Measuring  Clock CPU       LCD        Comparator  CHA      T D allt    MONITOR  0      lt  Generator PSS    1 to 4 le
145. ent  temperature and humidity  changes  drastically     Beep and Click Sounds  See 13 5 for the operating procedures   A beep sound is heard when an error occurs  You can turn OFF this beep sound  You    can also select to turn ON or OFF the click sound that is heard when the rotary knob is  turned     Error Logging  See 14 3 for the operating procedures   When a data error such as a data overflow or a communication error occurs  a   mark is  displayed in the upper right corner of the screen  In such instance  the error message is  logged  You can review these messages later     Self test  See 14 4 for the operating procedures   If you are in doubt as to whether the instrument has malfunctioned  you can run a self   test before contacting a YOKOGAWA dealer  You can run checks on the circuit board   the keys  the display  and other functions     Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function  Option    See chapter 9 for the operating procedures   The data around the spaces and marks of the specified condition can be extracted  The  data can be displayed in a histogram format or their statistics can be calculated  In  addition  the histograms and statistics of all marks and spaces of the measured data can  be displayed at the same time   Note that inter symbol interference analysis can only be performed on pulse width  measurements in the time stamp mode when the polarity setting is Ad     Analysis Example  Extracting the mark data before the 3T space              Mark Space Mark 
146. ent of  one sample ended is called a time stamp     Hardware histogram mode   The measured values and the frequencies of occurrence of those values are acquired in  the acquisition memory  The maximum sampling size  maximum number of data points  that can be acquired  is 10   points  There are three display formats  histogram  list   measured values and frequencies of occurrence   and statistics     The differences between the time stamp mode  T S   and hardware histogram  mode  H H      T S  H H   Histogram display Yes Yes  List display Yes Yes  Time variation Yes No  Statistics display Yes Yes  Multi window function No     Yes  Maximum sampling size 512 000 10    Longest sampling time 320 s   3200 s     1 When using the ISI  inter symbolic interference analysis function  in the T S  mode  the multi   window function is used    2 320s when the sampling interval is set to  0 us   3200 s when it is set to anything else     IM 704310 01E       1 4 Measurement Functions  Measurement Items     Period  See 5 2 for the operating procedures   Measures the pulse interval  time between rising edges or falling edges  of the input  signal  Either rising edge or falling edge can be selected  Channel A or B can be  selected for the measurement     Example  rising slope is selected     ij          Measured  Measured   Measured    CH A    i  ws TL f Lf Lf  Time Interval  See 5 3 for the operating procedures     Measures the time between the edge of the input signal of channel A and the firs
147. er  151  5175ns 20   00nS 3  3625s  162  6175ns 35  100ns 1656    216  3425ns 35  906ns 4 1175ns 1155             25g  1850ns 23 4008 4 000005  292  27750S 22  S0OnS 4 020005  329  0150ns 20  7001S 4 027508  365  1150ns 21  300nS 3  9500ns  401  825ns 17  z0ons 4 32508  0    35  906ns 5  465560ns 1666                      When the format is Window    Statistics Value Histogran  Area  Marker                         Iten Value  Average 114  42606nsec  Maximum 144  600nsec  Mininun 99  900nsec   Peak   Peak 44  166nsec  3 46225nS5eC     T SHE  d Average Errem  E L  Error HRE   MELE JE  Median JEEE   Node JE  Hunber 31703             Statistical parameters that are calculated   The following statistical parameters are calculated    Asterisks     are displayed for the statistics of the parameters that are not turned ON in  the dialog box that appears by pressing the  Calc Stat  soft key  see section 8 7     e Average e Measured T or Estimated T   e Maximum  only during auto window    e Minimum e Number  The number of samples of the items of which the  e Peak Peak Statistics are calculated            e o T   e o Average   e E L Error   e MELE   e Median   e Mode    e         is displayed when the measured data are invalid  or the measured data do not exist    e When displaying the statistics  the  Window  soft key of the DISPLAY key is not displayed  even when using the multi window or auto window function  To display the  Window  soft key   change to the histogram display     IM 7
148. f the main window     Moving the X1 and X2 markers simultaneously  4  Press the  X1 amp X2  soft key   Turning the rotary knob causes the X1 and X2 markers to move together     Setting the statistical calculation area  when the calculation area is set to Marker   5  Press the  Y Marker  soft key  Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the value    Selecting the speed of movement of the marker   6  Pressing the  Movement  soft key and selecting B   decreases the speed of  movement of the zoom box  Selecting  gt  increases the speed of movement   YOROGAWA 1996 61 62 16 19 19  TineStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 166066 Interval gus    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  1 000 Chi  1 666       Histogran  160666      Calc  AtBL        30n   BOONE  X1   8 900ns X2  zZ  0      nz AX  30  900ns  Wi  1 W2  1 unm  16060    Jared  Marker  g pX Marker fc  fay Marker   Movement  OFF PN    X1 X1 amp X2 16  gt  gt        ES  he i me Ll    7 17        pom dwes sw  oy  ul S INS  Y peze noajeD peinsesayy ay  HulAejds  iq x    7 8 Reading the Data    For time variation display   Moving the X marker   3  Press the  X Marker  soft key to select  X1  or  X2    Turn the rotary knob to move the marker  The time stamp and measured value at the position of the marker are displayed in  the bottom section of the main window     Moving the X1 and X2 markers simultaneously  4  Press the  X1 amp X2  soft key   Turning the rotary knob causes the X1 and X2 markers to move together     Moving
149. feed the paper for another 30 cm  The  paper will straighten out     12 3    sobew  ueei0s Buljjndino E       12 2 Printing    Procedure  Selecting the printer  1  Press the SHIFT COPY COPY MENU  key to display the Copy menu   2  Press the  Copy to  soft key to display the Copy Destination menu     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 28 09 08 25  Hardware Hist Pulse Width AmB Event 166600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch    1 666 ChB  6 606       Panorana    Adda i    Histogran 3T  Area  Window  Average 114  42560ns  Haximum 1435   966ns  Hininun 99 900ns  Peak   Peak 44  600ns  d 4 39825ns  I  I       mg       166606        50NE    Num  31703    y      a Copy to ra  Printer Comment faverreed   Abort      Sens ns  X1  95 000nS M2  133  660ns AX  368  006ns  W1  0 Wz          es  MM LIE JEJE JL IL     3  Press the  Printer  soft key to set the output destination to the printer        Copy Destination UZ  0 Num  31703    less  AL JE JL JL IL I Ld    Feeding the chart  4  Press the  Paper Feed  soft key to feed the chart           Setting comments   5  Press the  Comment  soft key to display the keyboard screen    6  Enter a comment according to the steps given in    Setting the file name    in 11 6   Copy    pe inte   connent faverreeal   Abort      ILIBLILI I   iz    Printing  7  Display the screen that you wish to print   8  Press the START STOP key to stop the data acquisition   Data acquisition is in progress while the indicator on the key is blinking   9  Pressing t
150. g box that appears by pressing the  Calc Stat  soft key  see section 7 5   When the statistic item is  T V    When the statistic item is  Hist      Statistics Yalue TimeYVatiation  Area   Window Statistics Yalue Histogran  Area  Window    Value Item Value    Average 49  63366ns                en  T Maxinun 23 07 ME 493 95003  1 050ns   CSC A E OS    T    290ens  O AVer age 6 241753   O T 6 299974  208   06ps  HEL 0  207  Median 49 656ns    O    oe    aem  Hunber 16666                T   dvAverage  prem   RF    OOo TR   ee                When the statistic item and format When the statistic item and format are  T V   and  are  T V   and  Block   respectively   All   respectively     statistics Yalue TimeVariation  Area  Block 5                                                 Value Statistics Value TimeVariation  Area  Block  T  Average 37 0575n Block T Average T Maxinun T Mininun T Peak Peak  T Hariman TRIR Ooo oO T O  T Mininun 36  625ons z  49 4575ns 46  966ns 966ps  T Peak   Peak 525ps 3   49 65966ns 49  966ns 49 27m 625ps  T  100 0p  4 49  37505 S5Ops  T  co Average  8  2702427 E 49  9250s 49 475n8 456ps  T   P P Average  1 416669  6   49 6656ns 49 90m 49  356ns 556ps  T RF 1 4031007 7 49 273 60Gps  T Hum 100 a  49 7406ns 49  566ns 456ps  3  49 5675ns 49  006ns 49  356ns 456ps  6 45  40005 BZ5pS  Note            is displayed when the measured data are invalid  or measured the data do not exist     7 8 IM 704310 01E       7 9 Displaying the Panorama Display     For a functi
151. g them    Ascii   e During hardware histogram mode   Saves the values  class values  and frequencies within the window of the histogram  display in text format  The data cannot be re loaded after they are saved    e During time stamp mode   Saves all of the data  time stamps and values  of the measurement block in text  format  The data cannot be re loaded after they are saved     File extension   The file extension is different for each data type  It is automatically appended to the file    e Bin   The file extension is  WVF  A header file in ASCII format is also saved  The  header file contains important information that is needed when analyzing the  measured data    e Ascii   The file extension is  ASD     IM 704310 01E    11 7 Saving and Loading the Measurement Results    Specifying the files to list   You can specify the type of files to display    e Item  Displays only measurement result files   e All   Displays All files on the medium     Data size   The data size varies depending of the number of samples  S  and the data type    Bin   e Data measured in the hardware histogram mode   Expressing the absolute value of the difference between the maximum value and the  minimum value of the measured data as P P  the data sizes are as follows  The  values inside parentheses are the data sizes for time interval measurements  AB     or A  B    and fixed pulse width  fH    P P lt 800 ns   Approx  136 KB  395KB   800 ns lt P P lt 1 6 us   Approx  272 KB  790 KB   1 6 us lt P P l
152. ge of the power  supply matches the rated electric power voltage for the instrument    e Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is  turned OFF    e To prevent electric shock or fire  always use the power cord supplied by  YOKOGAWA    e Always use protective grounding to prevent electric shock  Connect the power  cord of the instrument to a three pole power outlet that has a protective  grounding terminal    e Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding  otherwise  the protection function will be compromised        Connecting Procedure  1  Check that the power switch on the front panel is OFF   2  Connect the plug of the accessory power cord to the power connector on the rear  panel of the instrument   3  Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet that satisfies the conditions  below  The AC outlet must be a three pole type that has a protective grounding    terminal    Item Suffix 1 Suffix 5   Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 200 to 240 VAC  Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 264 VAC  Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60Hz  Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz 48 to 63 Hz  Maximum power consumption 200 VA 200 VA       IM 704310 01E 3 5    sjusWainseeyy Bunes a10jog o       3 4 Turning the Power Switch ON OFF    Points to Check before Turning ON the Power  Is the instrument properly installed  See section 3 2    Installing the Instrument      Is the power c
153. h Param  soft key to display the Graph Parameter menu   Press the  Grid    Connect   or  Dot Type  soft key to set them appropriately     Y1   1   466ns Graph Parameter SI    rid Comect  Dot Type LS  a Iten fa DFF  ON   OFF DH  Mark  Timevar   Style    Esc  C  iii  IL      Specifying the block number  only for block sampling in which the statistical  calculation area is set to  Block    2  Press the  Block Num  soft key    Turn the rotary knob to set the number of the block for which you wish to display   the statistics                    QpoW dwes sw  oy  ul S  NSaY peze nojeD peinseayy ay  HulAeldsig x    7 3 Displaying the Time Variation    Explanation    The size of the time variation display  Graph Size    Select from the following two choices    Half  Displays the time variation on the left half of the screen  The right half displays the  Statistics    Full   Displays the time variation on the entire screen     Selecting the display format  Style    In addition to the time variation  you can display the following items    e Panorama  Displays a panorama display  For setting the panorama display  see   section 7 5    e Statistics   Displays statistics  The statistical parameters to be displayed are set ina  dialog box that appears when the  Calc Stat  soft key is pressed  For  details  see section 7 6      Displays the read out values of the X and Y markers  The markers are  set using a menu that is displayed when the MARKER key is pressed     e Marker    Setting the gra
154. he COPY key makes a hard copy of the screen   To cancel the printing  press the  Abort  soft key in the Copy menu           12 4 IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    12 2 Printing    Comments  Comments  25 characters or less  are displayed in the top left section of the screen   They can be printed along with the waveform     Paper feed  You can feed the paper when checking to see whether the roll of paper is properly  installed or when you want to skip over a dirty section     Note  e You cannot print while the measurement is in progress  START STOP indicator is ON    e You cannot feed the chart while the measurement is in progress   e When the waveforms are overlapped  the color of the waveform on the screen temporarily  changes during printing     12 5    sobew  u    1  9S Buljndino R       12 3 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk  Internal  Hard Disk  Option   and External SCSI Device    Procedure  Selecting the medium  1  Press the SHIFT COPY COPY MENU  key to display the Copy menu   2  Press the ae ee eee to  soft key to display the Copy Destination menu        re Se ee ne   to  a File Nangit Forna  zira Ton oF ON  Media File List TSZ n ff ore    ator      Esc   PL JIL IL IE IL IL    3  Press the  Printer  soft key to set the output destination to media    Copy Destination  Uz  6 Num  31703    Printer ee Media   File Nameg  T   Half Tone a  TASZH TIFF OFF    Selecting the destination directory   4  Press the  File List  soft key to display the File List   Se
155. he histogram  e X CENTER  center value of X axis  range   50 ns to 3 2 us  e X Span  Select from 1 5  3  7 5  15  30  60  150  300  600ns  1 5  3  and 6 us  e Y Axis  Y axis scale   Select Lin  linear  or Log  logarithmic   e Y High  Maximum value of Y axis    e When the Y axis scale is Lin  Select from 10  20  40  100  200  400  1000  2000  4000    10000  20000  40000  100000  200000  400000  1e    1e     1e8  and 1e     e When the Y axis scale is Log  Select from 10   107  10    104  10    10    10     10    and 109   Readout  Values can be read by placing the X marker over the waveform  Marker display can  be turned ON OFF   Y marker  Statistical calculation area can be specified by setting the frequency   Marker display can be turned ON OFF    Statistical display  Can be turned ON OFF   e Area  Select the area  Window or Marker  on which to calculate the statistics    Select the polarity  k      4  or TE when measuring   Select the slope  A  B     A  Bt  or A  B f when measuring At Bf   Select the slope  ATB   A BJ or AtB   when measuring At B    e T Value  Set the T value of the statistical calculation   Range  1 ns to 250 000 ns  Multi window  The data of multiple histograms can be analyzed   Window size range  1 to 16  Auto window  The data of multiple histograms are analyzed automatically   Panorama display  Enables the user to observe an overall view of the histograms  e Panorama display can be turned ON OFF  e Panorama area selection  The range of 0 to 3 2 us can be
156. he rotary knob     Set using the numerical keys  Set using the rotary knob  f   Pop up a menu  scale       fax Center Jo  X Span W  Y High   Y Axis Ja ew indounu  114  900ns 60ns 1e5 Lin Panorama 3T    Using the rotary knob and SELECT key  In a setting screen as shown below  values are set using the rotary knob and SELECT  key   e When selecting an item  Move the cursor to the desired item using the rotary knob and press the SELECT key  to select the item        Calculation Statistics Setting          calculation Area   Windoul Marker 1  Use the rotary knob  to move the cursor to  T Value 38 000ns___  the desired item   Statistics 2  Select the item using    Average 2 Hai tna    Minimum the SELECT key         o  d Average  d T     E L Error  0  MELE  ode    fo  Median  co  Mod  All Clear             e When setting a numerical value  Move the cursor to the desired item using the rotary knob  and press the SELECT key  to display the numerical value input area  and enter the value using the numerical  keys        Calculationsstatistics Setting           Calculation Area  _Windou  Marker       Press the SELECT key to  display the numerical input  area  then enter the value  using numerical keys     T Value       e When checking a box  Move the cursor to the desired item using the rotary knob  press the SELECT key to  check or uncheck the box         Statistics    Minimum  d Average  MELE       d lo      T  o  E L Error  2   ode    fo  Median  o  Mod  All Clear               OFF  
157. he two values  100 ps rms or the display resolution    9 x trigger error    Accuracy      measurement resolution   time base frequency stability x measured value  300 ps  systematic error  Slope  Select T or J    Measurement range  e Time stamp mode  0 ns to 20 ms  e Hardware histogram mode  0 ns to 3 2 us  Display resolution  e Time stamp mode  25 ps  e Hardware histogram mode  Larger of the two values  25ps or  histogram X axis span 600   Measurement resolution    e Time stamp mode and  e theslopeisATBI ATBVA IBTI A LB     100 ps rms A input trigger error    B input trigger error     e theslopeisAIBI AIB     100ps rms A input trigger error   B input trigger error  trigger level timing error    e Hardware histogram mode and  e theslopeisATBI ATBVA LBI AIB      larger of the two values  100 ps rms or display resolution  Ainput trigger error   B  input trigger error    e theslopeisAIBI AIB      larger of the two values  100 ps rms or display resolution  Ainput trigger error   B  input trigger error   trigger level timing error    Accuracy        measurement resolution  time base frequency stability x measured value  1 ns  systematic error  Slope  Select from ATBVATBV A IBVAILBVAIBTVAIB   Continuous measurement condition    The time to the next edge of signal A after AtoB  measurement is 13 ns or more and the time from the  previous edge of signal A is 23 ns or more    IM 704310 01E    15 2 Measurement Functions  Measurement Items     Item Specification  Pulse width e Measureme
158. hoices  Select only during external arming    e 7  Arming occurs on the rising edge of the signal entering the external arming input  terminal    e J  Arming occurs on the falling edge of the signal entering the external arming input  terminal     jeubis indu  JUsWaINSeaLy   y  JO SUOI LIPUOD uonisinboy 3y  Huas o    6 4 Setting the Arming Source  Slope  and Delay    6 10    Selecting the type of arming delay   Select from the following choices  Select only during external arming    e OFF   You cannot select the arming delay  Arming delay is not executed    e Time  The measurement starts after being delaying for the specified time    e Event  The measurement starts after being delaying for the specified number of  events     Setting the delay time  Set the time within the following range  Set only when using the time delay   1 0 s to 1 0000000s  in 100 ns steps     Setting the number of events   Set the number of events within the following range  Set only when using the event  delay    1 to 1000000    Note         The delay event corresponds to the number of events of the input signal of the channel being  measured  However  in time interval measurements  it is the number of events of the input  signal of CHA     Selecting the arming level  Select from the following choices   TTL  1 4 V   TTL 10  0 14 V   and 0 V    IM 704310 01E       6 5 Setting the Inhibit Function     For a functional description  see 1 5      Procedure  1  Press the SAMPLE key to display the Sample menu
159. ing the ae soft key updates the date     PP 30 Year    Mo ame a ay     Nl 1998 E g a aoar T A                Esc    H A Bet IL IL    Setting the time  3  Press the  Time  soft key to display the Time menu     Conf iguration       ry a Beep lickSound   HDD Motor J LCDBright  Warning  Date Tine OFF DN    oF OFF fh  5 OFF iN     Esc     E JIL IL JL ILI    4  Press the  Hour  and  Minute  soft keys  and set the time with the rotary knob   5  Pressing the  Set  soft key updates the time     E e e p ar  DD  otm a          __            SOS moO       3 10 IM 704310 01E    3 7 Setting the Date and Time    Explanation  Setting the date  Set the year  month  and day   e Year  Selectable range  1998 to 2047  e Month  Selectable range  1 to 12  e Day  Selectable range  1 to 31    Setting the time  Set the hour and minute   e Hour  Selectable range  0 to 23  e Minute  Selectable range  0 to 59  The seconds are displayed on the screen  but they cannot be set  The seconds will  be set to 00 s when the  Set  soft key is pressed     Location of the date and time displays  The date and time are displayed at the upper right section of the screen     IM 704310 01E 3 11    sjusWwainseeyy Bunes a10jog o    Chapter 4 Basic Operations    4 1 Starting and Stopping the Acquisition of an  Input Signal       Procedure  z Measurement indicator  When measuring continuously     Starting the measurement  Press the START STOP key to start the measurement  The measurement indicator  lights   e Stopping the me
160. irectory  5  Select the medium  directory  according to the steps given in    Selecting the  directory in which to save the information    in 11 6     Setting the directory name   6  Press the  Dir Name  soft key to display the keyboard screen   Enter the file name according to the steps given in 4 2   Pressing the  Enter  key changes the file name     1998 12 08 21 26 14  Hardware Hist Period At Event 10000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  6 600  Chi  6 000       Histogran 3T     ore ist J    a ae e eS Create  lt SETUP2 gt  directory in    Frie Nan the FDO SETUP directory      FD      SETUPZ    er  gt     m INSERT             UNS    2  42  40  000n5 AX  46  000nS  Make Dir          esc  E MLE IE    Changing the file name  You can change the file name     Creating directories  Creates a directory on the floppy disk  internal hard disk  or external SCSI device     Note    e You cannot create directories while the measurement is in progress  Press the START STOP    key to stop the measurement    e Ifa file with the same name exists in the directory  you cannot change to that file name    e If a directory with the same name exists in the directory  you cannot create it    e Ifthe name of the WVF file is changed when  Filter  is set to  Item   the name of the HDR file  is also changed     11 25    Jd  amp  0  BuljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2       11 12 Connecting the Instrument to a PC    A PC will be able to access the internal hard disk  option
161. ising edge of  CHB    e AtB l  Measures the interval from a rising edge of CHA to the first falling edge of  CHB    e AlB f  Measures the interval from a falling edge of CHA to the first rising edge of  CHB    e AlB    Measures the interval from a falling edge of CHA to the first falling edge of  CHB    e A B t  Measures the interval from a rising or falling edge of CHA to the first rising  edge of CHB  At Bt and A  Bt are measured alternately  In addition  the  measured data corresponding to AtB tor AlB f  and A  Bt canbe  separated for the purpose of displaying histograms and calculating statistics    e AtB   Measures the interval from a rising or falling edge of CHA to the first falling  edge of CHB  A B  and A  B    are measured alternately  In addition the  measured data corresponding to AtB   orA B andA B  canbe  separated for the purpose of displaying histograms and calculating statistics    For the procedures related to displaying histograms for the separated data  see sections   7 1 and 8 1  For the procedures related to calculating statistics  see sections 7 6 and   8 7     5 3    suol OUN JUsWaINSes y pue spo Hbuljdwes ay  Buas a    5 3 Setting the Time Interval Measurement    Example of separating the data and displaying the histogram  Select either one    YOKOGAWA 1996 11 02 14 27 62  TineStamp Timelnterval ATBT Event 100000 Interval   6us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming       Ch  1 6066 ChB  1 006    Calculation Statist ics sett ing        Histogram AtB
162. ist  or  T V       Selecting the file in which to save the results  5  Press the  Save  soft key to display the File List and Save menu     aFile Ite re re  Btatistics Save Utility        b JL IL    6  Select the medium and directory according to the steps given in    Selecting the  directory in which to save the information    in 11 6    7  Press the  File Name  soft key to display the Save menu   Enter the file name according to the steps given in    Setting the file name    in 11 6           Saving the file   8  After setting the file name  pressing the  Save Exec  key saves the measured data  to the specified directory  the  Save Exec  key changes to an  Abort  key    Pressing the  Abort  soft key cancels the save operation   tile Hist Pulse Width APL Event 166666 mic Ait ir    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  uto Arming  ChA  1 000 Chi  6 606          Path   FDONTASZO  space 1210046                   AutoNan ing  114  42560ns  File Name 143  996ns  99 966ns    Comment YOROGAWA   44  900ns                4 39825ns  1  1          hd  X1  95 060ns xZ  133  000ns AX  38  600ns  save Menu    E   File Nang re  TA  Property  T    Ese   _  CG C LA LA CA ECA          Explanation    IM 704310 01E    11 8 Saving the Statistical Calculation Results    File extension  The File extension  csv is appended to the file name     Data size   For time stamp mode   Histogram statistics   1 KB   Time variation statistics  No block sampling    1 KB   Time variation statistics  Block sampling     8 
163. ives  For details  see the instruction manual for the PC or of the drive   You cannot change the drive letter of the instrument   Example  e PC has one internal HDD  Before connecting the instrument C    HDD     After connecting the instrument C    HDD   D    the instrument   e PC has two internal HDDs  Before connecting the instrument C    HDD   D    HDD   After connecting the instrument C    HDD   D    the instrument   E    HDD     In actuality  the letter assignments vary depending on the way the hard disks are  partitioned  the interface types  IDE  SCSI  etc    and the drive types     Note    The instrument can only be connected to the end of the SCSI chain  The internal hard disk of  the instrument has a built in terminator     11 27    Jd  amp  0  buljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hurnes 2    Chapter 12 Outputting Screen Images    12 1 Attaching the Paper Roll for Printing    Paper Roll for Printing  The printer uses a dedicated roll of paper provided by YOKOGAWA  Do not use any  other type of paper roll  When using the printer for the first time  use the roll of paper  that is included in the package  Order extra rolls from your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer  as listed on the back cover of this manual     Part No    B9O850NX  Specifications   Thermal sensitive paper  30 m  Sold in Packs of   5 rolls    Handling the Roll of Paper  The paper is a thermal sensitive paper that changes color with the application of heat   Take note of the following points     Storage precautions   
164. key to select  ON      YOKOGAWA 1996716729 09 22 05  TimeStamp Pulse Width Are Event 16060 Interval   6us       Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  1 6600 Chi  1 606                   ve  cns   sel   114 6256                                                 Ess  MMM LIL IL IL IE IL    C  o   5   amp       gt   D  5  mk  D  T  N   lt   3  o  z4  5     D   h  D         5      D   gt   5  2   lt   o   D   TI  c  5         O  5      O         O  5        IM 704310 01E 9 1    9 1 Using the Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function    9 2    Explanation    9  When  ISI  is turned  ON   the  Window  soft key appears in the menu of step 4   Press the  Window  soft key and set the value for constant T  T Value   Then   press the  Update to Window  soft key to reflect the value of constant T to the multi   window    10  Press the START STOP key to start the measurement     The inter symbol interference analysis function can be used only in the time stamp mode  with the function set to pulse width measurement  polarity set to  e  and the display  item set to histogram    When the inter symbol interference analysis function is turned ON  the window changes  to multi window mode     Performing the analysis   e The analysis is performed when  ISI  in the inter symbol interference analysis function  menu is switched from OFF to ON    e The analysis is performed again when the polarity  the trigger condition  the item being  analyzed  or other settings are changed     Note   e The 
165. l Input Output  See chapter 6 and 13 3 for the operating procedures   Input output terminals  BNC  for exchanging signals with external devices are provided  on the front and rear panels  For the locations of the terminals  see section 2 1    Front  Panel    and 2 2    Rear Panel        Reference input   The instrument has an internal reference clock used for making measurements   However  a 10 MHz external signal can be applied to the REFERENCE IN terminal on  the rear panel and can be used as the reference clock instead     Reference output   The internal reference clock signal or the externally applied reference clock signal is  passed through a 10 MHz band pass filter and continuously output from the  REFERENCE OUT terminal     Monitor output   The signal applied to the input terminal is voltage divided to approximately half its value  and output from this terminal    This signal can be used to check the waveform when phase correcting a probe  Which  channel s input signal is output varies depending on the measurement function     External arming input inhibit input   These signals are used to externally control the measurement functions of the  instrument  The external arming input terminal is shared with the external gate input  terminal  For the functions of the external arming or inhibit input signal  see section 1 5     Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured        Communication  See the    GP IB Interface User   s Manual     IM704310 12E     The 
166. l gate   1 us to 320 s  except within the maximum number of events of each sampling mode   Polarity  Select KH    or    Arming source  Select AUTO or EXT  EXT settings  e Delay time range during time delay  1 uss delay time  lt 1 s  Resolution  100 ns   e Range during event delay  1 to 10    Slope  Select T or J  Effective time  1 us to 320 s   1 us to 3 200 s when the sampling mode is set to other than 0 us or the sampling mode is set  to Hardware histogram mode   Polarity  Select or     1  Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed        15 4 Block Sampling    Item    Block pause mode  Block pause time    Conditions on use    15 4    Specification   Range of number of blocks Time stamp mode  1 to 100   Hardware histogram mode  1 to 1000   However  the number of samples that can be measured is determined by the maximum sampling  size for each mode    Select OFF  Time  or Event   RestTime  OFF  1us to 1 s  Resolution 100 ns    RestEvent  OFF  1 to 10    Resolution 1  Except the pause time is 500 ns or more and the  frequency is 50 MHz or less    Cannot use this function together with the external gate or the inter symbolic interference analysis  function  Event gate must be two or more     IM 704310 01E       15 5 Display    Item  Display    Display format    Specification    Size  6 4 inch   Resolution  640  H x 480  V  dots   Defect  0 01  or less with respect to the total number of pixels   Time stamp mode  Select from histogram  
167. l specifications  Protocol   Code   Mode   Address   Remote mode clear    IM 704310 01E    Specification  GP IB  Conforms to IEEE St   d 488 1978 JIS C 1901 1987     SH1  AH1  T6  L4  SR1  RL1  PPO  DC1  DT1  CO  Conforms to IEEE St   d 488 2 1992   ISO  ASCII  code   Addressable mode   0 to 30    The remote mode can be cleared by pressing the LOCAL  SHIFT AUTO SCALE  key  except  when Local Lockout is in effect     15 7    a suonesoads       15 10 SCSI  Option     Item Specification  Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface   ANSIX3 131 1986  Connector 50 pin half pitch  pin type     Connector pin assignmentsUnbalanced  single ended   built in terminator   Compatible SCSI devices  HD drive  NEC MS DOS ver3 3 or later or SCSI HD drives that can be formatted with EZ SCSI  MO drive  128  230  and 640 MB drives  MO medium uses semi IBM format   ZIP drive  PD drive     1 For details on which devices can be connected  ask your YOKOGAWA dealer        15 11 Time Base    Item Specification   Internal reference 10 MHz temperature compensated crystal oscillator  frequency  clock    Frequency stability Aging rate   1 5 ppm year    Temperature characteristics   2 5 ppm in the range from 5 to 40  C with 25  C as the reference  External adjustment Possible       15 12 Internal Memory Function    Store and recall 10 sets of setup information in the nonvolatile memory     15 8 IM 704310 01E    15 13 Built in Printer    Item Specification   Printing format Thermal line dot method  Dot de
168. lect the directory according to the steps given in    Selecting the directory in which  to save the information    in 11 6              Setting the file name and comment   5  Press the  File Name  soft key to display the Save menu    6  Enter characters in  Auto Naming    File Name   and  Comment  according to the  steps given in    Setting the file name    in 11 6     Selecting the output data format  7  Press the  Format  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  TIFF    BMP   or  PostScript               Path   FDO  Space 1242112 byte       File Name size    1998716728 69 68  1996 16 28 69 69  1998716726 69 16  1998716728 69 16          i sas ooons     i eoons AX  JB  d  ms  1  Hum  31703       esc    __  E im O O IL    12 6 IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    12 3 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk  Internal Hard Disk  Option   and External SCSI Device    Selecting half tone  only for TIFF and BMP   8  Press the  Half Tone  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select  ON Gray     ON Color     ON ColorR    or  OFF      Compressing the data  only for TIFF and BMP   9  Press the  Compression  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF      Saving   10  Set the screen to the screen you wish to save    11  Press START STOP to stop the measurement  The measurement is stopped when  the indicator on the key is turned OFF    12  Pressing the COPY key saves the image to the specified medium  To cancel the  save operation  click the  Abort  soft key in the Copy menu     T  a Copy to fa a File Na
169. lecting the  directory in which to save the information    in 11 6     Selecting the file to delete   7  Turn the rotary knob to select the file you wish to delete and press the  Set Reset   soft key  The     mark appears in front of the file name  If you press the same key  again  the     mark disappears     Selecting all files to be deleted   8  Press the  All Set  soft key to place     marks in front of all file names  the name of  the soft key changes to  All Reset    If you press the  All Reset  key  the     marks  disappear     Deleting the files  9  Pressing the  Del Exec  soft key deletes all files that have     marks     11 18 IM 704310 01E    11 9 Deleting Files    Setting the file attributes  10  Turn the rotary knob to select the desired file and press the  Attr  soft key to select   R  or  R W    Mark the files to delete      1998710723 09 01 16  Harduare Hist Pulse Width Aw Event 166006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   1 666  ChB  6 606V                   Size Mate z File attributes        FD      SCS e   DVD DC61   WWF 399012 1998 61 05 07 08  DUD DC61 HOR 1729 1995701705 07 08  DUD DCe2   HOR 1259 19985701705 07 11 4d  900ns  DVO DC6z   WWF 65704 1995701705 67 11 4 39825ns  DUD DD61  HOR 111  1996761765 67 61  138628 1998701705 67 61  1113  1996716721 18 12   WUF 130626 1998710721 18 12  TAS2Z0660  HDR 111  1998 61 65 66 11  TS_BLK1  HDR 1255 1996716721 18 62  TS_BLK1  WUF 65764 1998710721 18 62             K1  95 000ns M2  133 600ns  De
170. lete       a Function    Filter  Delete fet reser All Set   Property jitem f1    ttr   fer exer    oo T T ee e          Esc   _  E A A A nh i    Note  If the WVF file is deleted when  Filter  is set to  Item   the HDR file is also deleted        wn  D   lt    5   amp   D  5  2a  re  O  D  2  5   amp   J  D   r  D  D  5  2a  O  O  5  5  D  O     5  re       O  D  U  O    IM 704310 01E 11 19    11 9 Deleting Files    Explanation    11 20    Deletes the files that are saved on the floppy disk  internal hard disk  or external SCSI  device     Selecting the files to list  Filter    You can specify the type of files to list    e Item   Displays only the files that are specified in the  File Item  menu  Setup   Measure  or Statistics    e All   Displays all files on the medium     Setting the file attribute   You can set the attribute for each file  The following two attributes can be specified    e R W   Read and write possible   e R   Read only   Changing the attribute to  R  prohibits the file from being deleted  For files you do not  wish to delete  set the attribute to  R      Selecting the files to delete  Deletes all files that have     marks in front of them     Properties  Lists the file size  the date it was saved  the attribute  and the comment     Note         e You cannot delete files while the measurement is in progress  START STOP indicator is ON    e Files that are deleted cannot be recovered  Make sure not to delete files by mistake   e Directories can be deleted if
171. list  time variation  and statistics  Hardware histogram mode  Select from histogram  list  and statistics    Histogram display  during time stamp mode    Scale  X  and Y axis settings of the histogram  e X CENTER  center value of X axis  range   50 ns to 20 000000000 ms  e X Span  Select from 1 5  3  7 5  15  30  60  150  300  600 ns  1 5  3  6  15  30  60  150  300  600 Ls   1 5  3  6  15  and 30 ms  e Y Axis  Y axis scale   Select Lin  linear  or Log  logarithmic   e Y High  Maximum value of Y axis   e When the Y axis scale is Lin  Select from10  20  40  100  200  400  1000  2000  4000   10000  20000  40000  100000  200000  400000  1e    1e     1e8  and 1e    e When the Y axis scale is Log  Select from 10   107  10    104  10    10    10     108  and 10    Readout  Values can be read by placing the X marker over the waveform  Marker display can  be turned ON OFF   Y marker  Statistical calculation area can be specified by setting the frequency   Marker display can be turned ON OFF   Statistical display  Can be turned ON OFF   e Area  Select the area  Window or Marker  on which to calculate the statistics   Select the polarity  k      e  or TE when measuring  Select the slope  A  B     A  Bt  or A  B f when measuring At Bf  Select the slope  ATB   A BJ orA ftB   when measuring At B    e T Value  Set the T value of the statistical calculation  Range  1 ns to 250 000 ns    Histogram display  during hardware histogram mode    IM 704310 01E    Scale  X  and Y axis settings of t
172. lti window or auto window function  To display the  Window  soft key   change to the histogram display     8 4 IM 704310 01E       8 3 Displaying the Statistics     For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying the statistics  2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     1998712707 13 44 18 1  Hardware Hist Pulse Width Aw Event 166600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Ciock Int  Auto Arming  Ch    1 606 ChB  1 606       Statistics Yalue Histogran  Area  Marker   Average g d Average   1145682505 3  4135005 3 2255097  152 9937 Ms 3 0477 1 997900 6 257490  183  39475ns 3 26600nS 8  8a2242r  216 67300ns 3 65125ns 1 685156  9 868321  253  6456ns 3 6666ns 1 525574 10 4334677  291 9750  3 777508 1 293754  10 2093127  329  1050m  3 7700Ms 1 145435  16  188358   365  6725nS 3 8200ns 16 3217057  402  627511S 3 6350nS 3 521444   512  5175ns 2 4625ns 6  480232  6 652091                                a Item Style Ja  Statistics All  Window Calc Stat  MA LIL IL JL IL IL       3   Pressthe  Statistics  soft key     E r LD is play   Histogram List Statist ics e   f l alc Stat  a A   O    Esci  C  E OOL    Setting the display format  only when using the multi window or auto window  function    4  Press the  Style  soft key to select  All  or  Window     e When  All  is selected   5   Turnthe rotary knob to change the statistical parameters to be displayed     a   CS     5  a Item Style Ja  Btatistic
173. lue Histogram  Area  Window Calc  AtBL  Iten Value  Maxi imum 25     300ns  Peak   Peak 36  666ns  fij 4 49456ns  O T IEEE    O AVerage  E L Error                HELE ee  Median  Mode    10000       a ee l  MAE IL IL IL IL I C4    3  Press the  Statistics  soft key           Display  ten Nun  10000    me e pe a             CACAI    Selecting the items for which to calculate the statistics  4  Press the  Stat Item  soft key to select  Hist  or  T V       Display                      a Item stat Item re  Btatistics T U  Calc Stat    Esc   _  EH   C JL IL JL I    Setting the display format  only during block sampling when the statistical  calculation area is set to  Block  and  T V  was selected in step 4   5  Press the  Style  soft key to select  All  or  Block    e When  All  is selected  6  Press the  AW  soft key    Turn the rotary knob to scroll through the block numbers   7  Press the   lt 4  soft key    Turn the rotary knob to scroll through the statistical parameters       Hisplay    a Item  Stat Item  Style a 5  Btatistics Hist Ev  All  Block ftalesStat   f ap    Esci  C  iL i      e When  Block  is selected  6  Press the  Block Num  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to specify the number of the block you wish to display   Display    Item   Stat Item Sile a  elock Nu  Btatistics ist   U    all Calc Stat 1    Esci  C  E O O          IM 704310 01E 1 7    QpoW Awe1s sw  sy  ul S NS  Y pezye nojeD peinseayy oy  HuiAejdsig x    7 4 Displaying the Statistics    Explanation  Sel
174. maged    z  Cannot control via the The GP IB address is not correct  Use the correct address  i  GP IB interface  Using the interface in a way that does    not comply with the electrical and  mechanical specifications   IEEE S  d 488 1978        See the GP IB Interface User s Manual  IM704310 12E     IM 704310 01E 14 1    z Ssoueus UIeW pue Huljooyussjqnoiy       14 2 Messages    The following three types of messages can appear in the center of the screen    e Error messages  Displayed when an invalid operation is attempted or when the instrument is behaving  abnormally    e Warning messages  Displayed when the instrument is in a state in which the user needs to be warned  for  example when the measurement data overflows     e Alert messages  Displayed in cases such as before formatting a disk     This section describes the meanings of the error messages  except for communication  related error messages  and warning messages    For communication related error messages  100 to 299  400 to 499  912 to 915  see the  GP IB Interface User   s Manual  IM704310 12E      Execution Errors 600 to 799     Code  601  602  603  604  605  606  607    609   610   611  612  613   614   615  616 620  621   622 to 641  642   646 to 654  656 to 663  657  665    666    668  671    672  673  680  681  682  683  685  686  687    14 2    Message Description Page  Invalid path name or SCSI ID  The path name or the SCSI ID is not correct  11 4  11 11  No floppy disk inserted  No floppy disk is insert
175. mber of samples  Xi is the measured value of  each sample  and Xj  only for histograms  is the class value of each bin of the  histogram    If the statistics are calculated on the time variation     T     is placed in front of the  Statistical calculation parameter names     sien      e Average value  Calculates the average value of the measured values     n  1  Average          X   i  1    e Maximum value  Indicates the maximum measured value     Maximum   Xi  ax    e Minimum value  Indicates the minimum measured value   Minimum   Xi  nin  e Peak to Peak    Calculates the difference between the maximum and minimum values   Peak   Peak   Maximum     Minimum    e Standard deviation  c   Calculates the standard deviation of the measured values  This indicates the  degree to which the values are spread out from the average value     n       o     2 X      Average     i 1  e Flutter  o Average   Measures the flutter  This indicates the spread in the values in terms of a  percentage of the average value     2 x 100        o  Average            _        Average    e o T  only for histograms   Calculates the histogram jitter using the specified constant T  Indicates the spread  of the values in terms of a percentage of the value T     o T    x 100        e Effect Length Error  E L Error for short  only for histograms   XceENTER   S the center value of the x axis in the window  See section 1 7 for details   Originally  Xcenter represented the value around which the measured data woul
176. mum sampling size for the  appropriate sampling mode or when the maximum sampling time elapses    e When external gate is selected  block sampling is turned OFF and arming is set to Auto     6 3    jeubis indu  JUBWaINSeaLy   y  JO SUOI IPUOD uonisinboy   y  Buas o    6 4       6 2 Setting the Sampling Interval    Procedure    Explanation     For a functional description  see 1 5      1  Press the SAMPLE key to display the Sample menu     Selecting the sampling interval  2   Pressthe  Interval  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the sampling interval   Sampling interval    YOKOGAUA 1998701701 _ 16 14 29  TineStamp TimelInterval AtBL Event 10000  Inhibit Off Ref  Ciock Int  Auto rning   Cha  1 000 ChE  1 0004       hee haere Parre bae  acdhel neve cddey irren a PAUP PAGe coc       T  Maximum    xi  270  BUS M2  390 0uz JX  126  60us  UL    axe IZI sees AW  w  Yi   1 7 466ns Yz  32 6606ns JY  56 666ns    eS T a   ae ee ee E re Inhibit int  Clock   rning Block   FF  H H Ext   OCO ALLALI       The sampling interval is set only during the time stamp mode     Setting the sampling interval   Select from the following choices  During the hardware histogram mode  it is fixed to 0  u s and no menu is displayed    Ous 1usto1s in1 u s steps    The sampling intervalwhen 0 wu sis selected is approximately 23 ns     Note  If the sampling interval is changed  the time resolution of the time stamp also changes as  follows   Sampling Interval Time Resolution of the Tim
177. n Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured    Gate    Sampling Interval     See 6 1 for the operating procedures    You can specify the size of a measurement block in terms of the number of events or the  gate time  Measurement is carried out for the number of events or over the time when  the gate is open  There are three types of gates     Event gate   Each sample is called an event  For example  measurement of one period is equivalent  to one event  Up to 512 000 events during time stamp mode  and up to 10   events  during the hardware histogram mode can be set as long as the time is within the  maximum sampling time  see page 1 4  since arming  see next page      Time gate  Up to 10 s of gate time can be set as long as the maximum sampling size of each  sampling mode is not exceeded     External gate  The external arming input terminal  see next page  is used to control the gate  The gate  can be open for up to the longest allowed sampling time  see page 1 4  as long as the  maximum sampling size of each sampling mode is not exceeded  You can also select  which polarity  positive or negative  to use in opening the gate    Gate is open     1 Measurement block     lt        Input signal at ted ed LL _   N Wx Onno o o y    S1 S2 s3  Start of measurement    External gate     See 6 2 for the operating procedures    The sampling interval is the interval at which data samples are acquired    Samples are acquired continuously at the specified interval  However  samples cann
178. n access error  604  Media failure  may occur in which case no more data can be written  When you are using a  medium for the first time or if the medium can no longer be read  do a  Normal  format  If you  want to format a disk that you have been using before  do a  Quick  format    e If you attempt to format a hard disk in a way such that any one partition is larger than 2 GB   an error Occurs    Set the partitions so that they are all less than 2 GB     Jd  amp  0  buljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hulaes 2    11 6 Saving and Loading Setup Information    Procedure    1  Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE  key to display the File menu   2  Press the  File Item  soft key to display the File Item menu     EE T     File Ite Fa Fa P  Setup Load Save Utility  esdi JL JE JE JE JL JL J    3  Press the  Setup  soft key     PC File Ttem_      Eee keta fe fe     Save Utility    Esc   PIL JL IL JL IL IL    Saving the setup information  Displaying the Save menu  4  Press the  Save  soft key to display the Save menu                    File Ite  P   P  f _ le     JE JL IL   LIL    Selecting the directory in which to save the information  5  Press the  File List  soft key to display the File List        save Menu    Ti le List a fave med  bat JL IL IE IE IL    6  Turn the rotary knob to select the medium  displayed with     and press the  SELECT key  Similarly  select the directory  displayed with  lt  gt                             Path   FDO  Space 1451520 byte  File Nane       size       Medium
179. n the appropriate range  the gain will not  be constant across different frequencies and proper waveforms cannot be input to the  instrument  However  the input capacitance of each probe is not necessarily the same   Thus  a variable capacitor  trimmer  is attached to the probe for making adjustments   This adjustment is called phase correction    Perform phase correction on all probes that are to be used for the first time  Since the  appropriate input capacitance varies for different channels  phase correction must also  be performed when changing channels     Calibration signal   Waveform type   Square wave  Frequency   1 kHz  Voltage   1 Vp p    Waveform differences due to probe   s phase correction    Correct waveform Over compensated  the gain Under compensated  the  at the high frequency region gain at the high frequency  is too large  region is too small                                                                       sjusWwainseeyy Bunes a10jog o    3   Setting the Date and Time    Procedure  1  Press the UTILITIY key to display the Utility menu   2  Press the  Config  soft key to display the Configuration menu           Pot IE IL IE JL IL    Setting the date  3  Press the  Date  soft key to display the Date menu     Configuration  ra Fa Beep lickSound   HDD Motor  QLCDBright  Warning  Date Tine OFF fin    OF OFF pN 5 OFF fin       esc  MME IL IL IEE EE Ld    4      Press the  Year    Month   and  Day  soft keys  and set the date with the rotary  knob   5  Press
180. naming function   When  Auto Naming  is turned ON  files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are  automatically created  Specify the common name  maximum of five characters  specify  at the File Name item  that is placed before the three digit number     Note  e You cannot save screen image data while the measurement is in progress  START STOP  indicator is ON    e When saving the image data with the half tone set to OFF or saving to the Postscript format  and the waveforms are overlapped  the color of the waveform on the screen temporarily  changes during saving     12 8 IM 704310 01E    Chapter 13 Using Other Functions       13 1 Initializing the Setup Information    Procedure    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 8      1  Press the SHIFT MARKER INIT  key to display the Initialize menu   2  Press the  Execute  soft key     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 28 69 13 39  Hardware Hist Pulse Width AR Event 1666006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Ciock Int  Auto Arming   ChA  1 666 ChB  6 606       Panorana    Adda i       TS        Histogran 3T  Area  Window    Average 114 42560ns    100000  Maximum 143  900m3  Minimum 99  900ns  Peak   Peak 44  0900ns  d 4 39825ns  i    i        30mE g ns  X1  95 666ns XZ  133  066ns AX  38 006ns  U1  6 UZ  6 Hun  31763    Execute       es   TIL JL IL IE LE Ld    Initializing  3    AnAlert   menu is displayed  Turning the rotary knob to select  OK  and pressing    the SELECT key executes the initialization   Alerttt          Select    
181. nd Uses of Parts   Describes the names and uses of each part of the instrument  For keys  references are   given to sections  or pages  in the manual where operating procedures are explained    Chapter3 Before Starting Measurements   Describes precautions on use  how to install the instrument  how to connect the power   supply  turn ON OFF the power switch  connect a probe  and set the date and time    Chapter 4 Basic Operations   Describes how to start stop the measurement acquisition of input signals  enter values   using the numerical keys  and operate the rotary knob    Chapter5 Setting the Sampling Mode and Measurement Functions   Describes how to set the sampling mode and measurement function  item     Chapter6 Setting the Acquisition Conditions of the Measurement Input Signal   Describes how to set the acquisition conditions of the measurement input signal such as   input coupling  input impedance  trigger mode  trigger level  gate  sampling size    Sampling interval  arming source  slope  delay  and inhibit B   Chapter 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results in the Time Stamp Mode   Describes how to configure the displays such as histograms  time variations  lists    Statistics  and panorama    Chapter 8 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results in the Hardware  Histogram Mode   Describes how to configure the displays such as histograms  lists  statistics  multi    windows  panoramas  and histogram sum    Chapter9 Using the Inter symbolic Interference Analysis F
182. ndow J    Label Center pan Left ira Right Marker  Windoui i     c 140  oes   i 160  606ns 146     00ns    246  600ns 220     600nS 268  Booms  200  600ns 260  600ns 360  666ns  320  600ns 300  600ns 340   600n5  360  606ns  340  G00nS  400  600ns 380         ns  440  600ns                                     Windoui   TA          Automatically configures the T value and X axis values of each window    Scaling Function  See 7 7 and 8 8 for the operating procedures   To display the measured data  various values must be set such as the minimum value or  the center value of the X axis  the X axis span  the center or the maximum value of the  Y axis  and the Y axis span   This instrument has auto scaling in which the X axis and Y axis parameters are  automatically set according to the data  It also has manual scaling in which the X axis  and Y axis parameters can be set arbitrarily     For time variation oe For histogram display    Area  Window  Average 5  66900ns  Maximum 24 106ns  Minimum  8  366ns          P cai p i i m  hams    49 6700ns          See ai Ar ae ee        T  Maximum 4  925ns    Peak   Peak 32  406ns  d 3 26756ns             Prock 30   BU th ae he oS ole He te Hee gt Goh eden as l Lagga Ep eE ah a Ge a ee Ea  l pS as aie E        BLOCK 3 hs gin tae hee Ah  ep  Sh sa a   i eee me       X axis min  value X axis center value  Y axis center value X axis span    Y axis max  value X axis span  Y axis span    1 24 IM 704310 01E       1 8 Other Functions    External Signa
183. ndows can  be set    By using this function in conjunction with the panorama display  you can easily see which  histogram among the various windows is being displayed or set      TI  c     O     O             Select multi window  Number of windows    indow Parameter Setting  sd    Panorana    Mode  Single Multi     Auto_   lt Size   10 _J  gt   T Value  ____38 000ns____   Update To Window     Center Span Left Marker Right Marker    114  900ns 55  000ns 133  600nS  152  660ns 171  600ns  190  000ns 171  900ns 209  00nS    226  600ns 24    606nS  265  606ns   323  606ns    266  600nS 245   6G0nS  361  606ns                      Window  Windouz  Windows  Window  Windows  Window6  Window   Windows     Window  Windowie                                                      304  660ns  342  660nS  380   BOOS  416  660ns  532  Q00nS    323  666ns  361  666ns  339  606ns  437  666ns  591   06ns                      399  o00ns  513  000ns                            Display area of each window    Summation display   The histograms  enclosed by the X1 and X2 markers  of all windows that have been set  with the multi window function can be summed and displayed in one window  The center  values of the X axis of the histogram of each window are aligned and the frequencies of  each bin are summed    Only the histograms in the area enclosed by the markers are summed    You can compare the data distribution between each histogram and calculate the  Statistics of all histograms at once     Panor
184. ng  Format fJesHalf ToneCompressio  Media File List TASZ  TIFF OFF ON    JILILILI Go Ee oo       12 7    sobew  ueei0s Buljjndino E    12 3 Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk  Internal Hard Disk  Option   and External SCSI Device    Explanation  The screen image can be saved to the floppy disk  the internal hard disk  option   or to  an external SCSI device     Selecting the output destination  For the procedure to select the medium and directory  see    Selecting the directory to  save the information    in section 11 6     Output data format   The following formats are available for saving the image data to the medium  The file  extension that is automatically appended to the file and the file size  half tone OFF  no  compression  are indicated below     Data format Extension File Size   TIFF   TIF Approx  38 KB  Approx  302 KB   BMP   BMP Approx  38 KB  Approx  302 KB   PostScript  PS Approx  78 KB    The file size inside parentheses is the size when half tone is turned ON     Half tone  for TIFF and BMP   On Gray  gives 16 grades of shading  ON Color  gives 256 colors  There is no gradation  if it is tuned OFF     Comments  If a comment up to 25 characters in length is displayed beforehand in the upper left  section of the screen  it is saved along with the waveform image     Data compression  for TIFF and BMP    For TIFF and BMP formats the data can be compressed using LZW and RLE   respectively    However  compression is not possible when the half tone is OFF     Auto 
185. ng hardware histogram mode  10     Sampling interval   O us  1 us to 1s  Resolution  1 us     If O us is selected  the sampling interval is set to the interval of the maximum sampling rate     approx  23 ns     Select only during the time stamp mode   Longest sampling period   When the sampling interval is set to 0 us   320 s  Time after arming     When the sampling interval is other than 0 us or when the mode is set to hardware histogram    mode   3200 s  Time after arming      1  Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed      2  A value measured with the input coupling set to DC  input impedance set to 1 MQ  under standard operating conditions as    described in    General Specifications     and after the warm up time has passed     IM 704310 01E    15 1    a suonesoads       15 2 Measurement Functions  Measurement Items     Item  Measurement update  rate      Frequency    Time interval  e AtoB interval    15 2    Specification   400 ms  hardware histogram mode only    Update rate when measuring the period of a 1 MHz sine wave with the sampling size  number of  events  set to 1000     Measurement range  e Time stamp mode  8 ns to 20 ms  e Hardware histogram mode  8 ns to 3 2 us  Display resolution  e Time stamp mode  25ps  e Hardware histogram mode  Larger of the two values  25 ps or  histogram X axis span 600   Measurement resolution    e Time stamp mode   100 ps rms   9 x trigger error    e Hardware histogram mode     Larger of t
186. nge 8 ns to 250 ns  T resolution Measured T  12 8ps    15 6 IM 704310 01E       15 7 Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function   Option     Item  Function    Measurement conditions  Extraction mode   Trigger   Target    Specification   A function in which the data around the specified space or mark are extracted and the histogram  and statistics of the data are displayed    In the time stamp mode measuring the pulse width with the polarity set to TE   Select from Single  Combination  and Between   Select mark or space   Select the data to be analyzed for the trigger from Prev   Next  and Both       15 8 Rear Panel Input Output    Item  Reference input    Reference output    Specification   e Connector type  BNC   e Input coupling  AC   e Input impedance  1 kQ or more   e Input frequency range  10 MHz 10 Hz  e Input level  1 Vp p or greater   e Maximum input voltage   10 V    e Connector type  BNC   e Output coupling  AC   e Output impedance  50 Q  Typical value      e Output frequency  10 MHz  Typical value     e Output level    1 Vp p or greater    Monitor output  CHA CHB    Connector type  BNC    e Output impedance  50 Q  Typical value     e Output level    Approx  one fourth of the input signal   5 V or less      1  Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed    2  The level when the input impedance of the receiving side is 50 Q        15 9 GP IB Interface    Item   Interface   Electrical and mechanical  specifications   Functiona
187. ns        m     D     5       r   gt   D     D  D  m            Q  Rime  O            D  emp  D  Q  JJ  D  on        T  5     3  D  L  D     Q     D         T  m     O         9   3         Q  D    IM 704310 01E 8 11    8 5 Using the Multi Window Function    Setting the X axis of the window  You can change the settings of the following parameters for each window     e Label   Window name  Selectable range is 1 to 16   e Center   Center value  e Span   Window width    e Left Marker   X1 marker position   e Right Marker  X2 marker position   Calculates the statistics in the area enclosed by the Left Marker and Right Marker   For the ranges of each parameter  see sections 8 8 and 8 9     Selecting the window to display  WindowNum    Selects which window to display    You can select the window that was set in the Window Parameter Setting menu  All  or   Summation    All   Displays the histogram of all windows and lists the statistics of each  window    Summation   Sums the histograms of all windows and displays the result     When the window is set to ALL       Histogram All   190000                                     indo Haximun Minimum Displays the first three  3T   _114 42500ns 143  900ns 99 500ns  aT 182 000ns 1220005 parameters that were  ST   13458900M 226  000nS 160 600ns    6T 258  00Ons 198  000ns turned ON using the  7T 236  000nS 237 500m  8T   __303  8850ns 334  000ns 274  3000S  Calc Stat  soft key   T  342  9150ns 372 000nS 314 000ns  10T 409 4003 351 300ns  11T 4
188. nsity 8 dots mm   Paper width 112 mm   Recording width 104 mm    15 14 Built in Floppy Disk Drive    Item Specification   Drive type 3 5 inch floppy disk   Number of drives 1   Format type 640 KB  720 KB  1 2 MB  1 44 MB  MS DOS compatible     15 15 Internal Hard Disk Drive  Option     Item Specification  Number of drives 1  Capacity 3 2 GB  IBM format       The hard disk can be mounted on a PC  Windows 95 compatible     IM 704310 01E    15 9    a suonesoads       15 16 General Specifications    Item    Specification  Complies with EN61010 1    Safety standard    e Overvoltage category   and II  e Pollution degree 1 and 2    Standard operating   Ambienttemperature 2342  C O         O          aa    Standard operating  conditions    e Ambient humidity  50 10 RH    e Power voltage and frequency error  Less than 1  of the ratings    Operating altitude    2000 m or less    Approx  30 minutes    e Temperature   20 to 60  C  e Humidity  20 to 80 RH  no condensation     Warm up time  Storage conditions    Operating conditions    e Temperature  5 to 40  C    e Humidity  20 to 80 RH  no condensation     Rated supply voltage    100 to 120 V AC  suffix code  1   200 to 240 V AC  suffix code  5     Permitted supply voltage 90 to 132 VAC  sulfixcode 1      OC C    lt C lt CSstCS    Permitted supply voltage    180 to 264 V AC  suffix code  5     range  Rated supply voltage  frequency    50 60 Hz    48 to 63 Hz    Permitted supply voltage    frequency range    200 VA    Maximum power    con
189. nt 166666 OE ate ee    Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto rning  Ch  1 000 Chi  6 000  Wi       Mode  Single _ Auto Size 16    T Value 36  660ns   Update To Window                 Center Span Left Marker Right Marker    Window  C  Window2  Window C   209  000nS  Window4 C     24   OOOnS  Window  Windows  Window    R  Windows E f f 399  000ns  Windows C   C 43   000nS  Window10 551  000ns                                     es   JL Ji JEJE JE JL I    8 10 IM 704310 01E    8 5 Using the Multi Window Function    Explanation  Window size         Select multi window  Displays the histogram of 3T       indou Parameter Setting                           AAAAAA i SE sie  ons T zus  Histogram 3T  Area  Window T Value 38  660ns  Update To Window i  100000   Average  114 42500ns L  I z                     center Left Marker Right Marker  114  660ns 95  600ns 133  666ns  eco  00N 269   666ns 24 7  Ob6ns  364  600ns 265  600ns 323  600ns  342  600ns 323  660ns 361  606ns  380   600ns 361  600ns 399  o00ns    416  60605 399  00n  437 000E  odz   HONE 913  666ns 551  606ns      Maximum Span  E l   Minimum   i   Peak Peak  d    144  900ns  99  966ns  44 pans   4  39825ns  l   l       Windowt           Windowe  Windows  Window4  Windows  Window6  Window   Windows  Windowd  Window16                                              is  SER a  az  T33 666y AX  36  6606ns  UZ  6 Num  31763           866s    Disp    Vi     Ppa  Tten  a re Bindo  opm p fom PG    Center value of window  scale value  Set th
190. nt range  e Time stamp mode  8 ns to 20 ms  e Hardware histogram mode  8 ns to 3 2 us  e Display resolution  e Time stamp mode  25 ps  e Hardware histogram mode  Larger of the two values  25 ps or  histogram X axis span 600      Measurement resolution    e Time stamp mode and  e the polarity is k   or   44     100 ps rmstrising trigger error   falling trigger error    e the polarity is he     100 ps rmstrising trigger error   falling trigger error   trigger level timing error    e Hardware histogram mode and  e the polarity is k   or    Larger of the two values  100 ps rms or the display resolution  rising trigger error     falling trigger error    e the polarity is ah      Larger of the two values  100 ps rms or the display resolution  rising trigger error     falling trigger error   trigger level timing error      e Accuracy       Measurement resolution  time base frequency stability x measured value  1 ns  systematic error    e Polarity  Select from l  i oee     1  A value measured under standard operating conditions as described in  General Specifications  after the warm up time    has passed    2  Trigger error  A input trigger error  B input trigger  rising trigger error  and falling trigger error are defined by the following  equation   2   X   Input amplifier noise  rai En   Noise on the measured signal  S R S R  Slew rate of the input signal  V s    3  The trigger level timing error is defined by the following equation   F 8 mV B 8 mV   trigger level setting accuracy
191. of the input signal during the first  measurement block to be 100  and 0   respectively  the trigger level is set to the  specified percentage level  Unlike single trigger  the trigger level is reset for each  measurement block     When the  Level  is set to 50  using single auto trigger    Detect max  min  values 1st measurement block  Max  value  100      50  level       Min  value  0      Trigger activated    Reference Signal I O  See 6 7 for the operating procedures   Reference input  The instrument has an internal reference clock used for making measurements   However  a 10 MHz external signal can be applied to the REFERENCE IN terminal on  the rear panel and can be used as the reference clock instead     Reference output   The internal reference clock signal or the externally applied reference clock signal is  passed through a 10 MHz band pass filter and is continuously output from the  REFERENCE OUT terminal     1 12 IM 704310 01E       1 6 Analysis and Calculation    Readout Function  See 7 8 and 8 9 for the operating procedures   X1  X2  and Y markers can be displayed for histogram displays  see section 1 7   X1   X2  Y1  and Y2 markers can be displayed for time variation displays  See section 1 7    The coordinates of the cross points of these markers and the histogram and time  variation graphs can be read  In addition  statistical calculation can be performed  independently over the area enclosed by the markers  see next section      For histogram displays   The v
192. olec a e E ame 1 13   Readout FUNCION Aarna na N A ale al ies i all sal ee  1 13   Slalistical calcula io ci5 niet ce E AAE A A Gia ge wanted ee 1 14   1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results              ccccccccecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeees 1 18   Histogram DIS DIAY sererai aa E O E OA a teanides awcee span E N 1 18   EISEDISPIAY esn e a a aa a a aani 1 19   TIME  vaiaiom DISDIAY eia e a Eae a a 1 20   Staustics DISPRIY zea a a a E S bacmuablaasnteatanhalsaubluarouaticaveente 1 21   Panorama DIS QIAY  aeaa e a a beagtuatee dabablundes 1 22   M  t  WiITKGOW TUN CHOIN armia eneneranetaasdeoane coe aenareeeganesaccecstecaneest ant ceaseestacaanes 1 23   Auto  Wind OW THNCTION  Scaling FUNCION de credcscascsssacecatectoreaauas cs r 1 24   Me EBON Ollor enre acute sapnssaga esta ent eaguessodtagaa corsa eae A 1 25    Chapter 2  2 1   2 2   2 3  Chapter 3  3 1   A 3 2  A 3 3  3 4   A 3 5    External Signal Input Output  Communication  Storing and Recalling Setup Information    Saving and Loading Data from Floppy Disks  the Internal Hard Disk  and External SCSI Devices   Initialization  OF Setup IMFOMMALON saaa a E addew diner rand aed E adeareimausannce 1 25  Calibration  Beep and Click Sounds  Error Logging  Self test    Inter symbol Interference Analysis Function  Option                 ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaueeseeeeeesuaaseeeeesananeeeeeeeeas 1 26    Names and Uses of Parts    FAVA Pcl eae IN AT ENEA EAE een eh cle pean ee oe R ok eae AE 2 
193. onal description  see 1 7      Procedure  1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu        Display  a Iten P ry ry  TineVar   Style raphParan   CalcrStat    Esc   PL JE ILE JL IL JL    3  Press the  TimeVar   soft key     Display  ten Y  50 000ns    Histogran List frinevar    tatistics    JL JRL IL JL IL 4    Displaying the panorama  4  Press the  Style  soft key to display the Display Style menu and press the  anor mna soft key to select  ON             Display Style   ____braph Fart  or od cre OR rF On     Sree tas   fT To YOD y  Esc       _         L JOCJO    Setting the range to display in the panorama display  5  Press the SCALE key to display the Scale menu   6  Press the  Panorama  soft key to display the Panorama menu                 T       BLOCK NUMBER 10 1998710729 09 41 42   TimeStanp Pulse Width APU Event 1066 Interval 6 6us   Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch    68 666 ChE  6 600  BlockSize 10 RestTime_1 9000ms  Panorama       Zoom box    i  T average    49  T Maxinun      7 A   i    proc Jea ee B gai i   ee pias Gs este as   Sate 1 CETE ERT EERE   EEEE      BLOCK 3 Paani s ot RPh es heen       1 1666ms  x1  1 1632ms M2  1 1762ms AX  67  0us T Nun  1000  Wi  49 437ns yz  49 637ns AU  6 20605  Y1  40 175ns YZ  50 675ns 4    2 506ns    Cs ee   ia X Minimum e X span  ts    center P Y Span  a  1 1000ms 1z20us 49 42503 Z 5ns    Panorama  T JE JE JE JL IL  EO       QpoW Adwe1s sw  oy
194. only on the negative side of the waveform     e    e   Calculates the statistics on both the positive and negative sides of the  waveform     Time interval measurement Pulse width measurement          Calculation Statistics Setting Calculation Statistics Setting                                  Calculation Area   Window  _ Marker Calculation Area Window      Marker    Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity LeU Te Pe   T Value L480  600ns___  T Value C 2 00m   Statictirce          IM 704310 01E    7 14       7 7 Changing the Scale Value    Procedure    IM 704310 01E     For a functional description  see 1 7      Executing auto scaling  1    Pressing the AUTO SCALE key executes auto scaling     Executing manual scaling  1  Press the SCALE key to display the Scale menu     For histogram display     Setting the center value of the X axis  2  Press the  X Center  soft key   Use the rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the value     Selecting the X axis span  3  Press the  X Span  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the value     Selecting the maximum value of the Y axis  4   Pressthe  Y High  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the value        Selecting the scale type of Y axis  5  Press the  Y Axis  soft key to select  Lin  or  Log      YOKOGAWA 1998 61 02 16 13 16   TineStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 10000 Interval Gus   Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 600  Chi  1 600 Blocksize 1 Rest0ff  Histogran       Area  Window Calc AtBL  Average 5 78800ns  
195. or output terminal A  Outputs input signals  section 13 3       coma O    Do not operaje without iene groet mhe fee Bone from ibration    In users manual ty cone precautions   ese   Hed  kernal fra disk type         ADJUST ae                    ADJUST AN    REFERENCE aii OUT  IN QUT CHB  6  10MHz 1Vp p 10MHz 1Vp p  500   509  O  GP IB  IEEE488   N scsi     CD               re    O  mH    A  100 120V AC   AN oova MAX 50 60Hz  FUSE 250V T 3A          O  MODEL    O i  SUFFIX  ee  A OoOo o O  YOKOGAWA   Made in Japan  Vent holes Mi                GP IB connector  Connect to external device for communication  See the GP IB Interface User   s Manual  IM704310 12E         Warning plate     Page 4  Section 3 1     SCSI connector   option   Connect SCSI  devices    Section 11 3      Power cord  connector A   Connect the  power supply   Section 3 3   Name plate   Page2     IM 704310 01E       2 3 Screen Display    IM 704310 01E             2  Comments 3  Date and time  Rasa 1998 10 22 09 41 55 4  System icon  isp  Se a ee  a 101     1        Cha  1 000 ChB     90U   5  Busy icon  information Panorana  13  Zoom box 6  Panorama  ie r m W M display  r Hist  37  area  Wind  12  Y axis en erage TIA AZOO      Maximum 144  000z whe  maximum   Minimum 99  900ms 7  Statistics  l Peak Peak  44 100ms    value 7 ag display    8  X axis width         9  Read out value    un  3    Ui  6 Ue  6 HN  E e  fx Center ie X Span Ie  Y High   DU indounu  114 006ns 6ons 1e4 Log    Panorama 3T  C A C 10  Cente
196. ord properly connected  See section 3 3    Connecting the Power Cord        Location of the Power Switch and ON OFF Operation  The power switch is located on the lower left corner of the front panel  To turn the power  ON  press the switch once  To turn the power OFF  press it again     i    p            Power Up Operation  When the power is turned ON  the instrument executes the following initialization checks   The front operation panel is disabled during the check  When the initialization  completes  the display format screen  the screen that is displayed when the DISPLAY  key is pressed  appears     e ROM Check e SRAM Check   e DRAM Check e SRAM Cal Check   Calibration data check  e Device Check  Internal hardware check   Note    If the instrument fails to power up as described  turn OFF the power switch and check the  following points    e Is the power cord securely connected    e Is the correct voltage coming to the power outlet  See section 3 3    If the instrument still fails to power up after checking these points  the instrument probably  has malfunctioned  Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer     For Making Accurate Measurements  Under the installation conditions described in 3 2  turn ON the power switch and allow  the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes before starting measurements     Shut Down Operation  When the power switch is turned OFF  the setup information is retained  but the  measured data are not  Make sure to save important data to the flopp
197. ot  be acquired continuously if the period of the input signal is shorter than 23 ns    The operation varies depending on the sampling mode     During time stamp mode   The TA520 generates sampling pulses  see the measurement block section described  earlier  at the sampling interval  After the sampling pulse  when the input signal meets  the trigger condition  trigger level  slope  etc    a measurement is made  The available  sampling intervals are 0 us and 1 us to 1 s  When 0 us is selected  the data are sampled  at approximately 23 ns intervals     During hardware histogram mode  The sampling interval is fixed to approximately 23 ns and cannot be changed     IM 704310 01E    Arming    Arming Delay    IM 704310 01E    1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured     See 6 4 for the operating procedures    Arming is the trigger that starts the measurement of a measurement block  There are  two types of arming  auto arming in which the measurement starts when the START key  is pressed or the START command is issued  and external arming in which the  measurement starts when an external signal is received     Auto arming  Arming is activated automatically after the START key is pressed or the START  command is issued  In this case  the arming source is an internal signal     External arming   After the measurement is started  arming is activated by applying a signal to the external  arming input terminal  In this case  the arming source is an external signal  
198. oy  HuiAesdsig          8 5 Using the Multi Window Function     For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu   Press the  Window  soft key to display the Window Parameter Setting menu     PD E E  a Item  a Pa BU indounw  Histogran f Style Calc Stat 3T    es   _  i JL JIE JL IL     Setting the window mode to multi window  2   Turnthe rotary knob to select  Mode   Press the SELECT key to select  Multi      Setting the window size   3  Turnthe rotary knob to select  Size    Press the SELECT key to display the numerical entry area and enter the size with  the numerical keys     Setting the constant T   4   Turnthe rotary knob to select  T Value    Press the SELECT key to display the numerical entry area and enter the value with  numerical keys     Updating the window  5   Turnthe rotary knob to highlight  Update to Window    Pressing the SELECT key updates the center  span  and marker values     Setting the various values of the window   6      Turnthe rotary knob to highlight  Label    Center    Left Marker  or  Right Marker  of  the appropriate window and enter the value with the numerical keys   For  Span   pressing the SELECT key after highlighting it displays a selection  menu  Turn the rotary knob to select the desired value from the menu     Selecting the window to display   7  Press the  WindowNun  soft key of the DISPLAY menu   Turn the rotary knob to select the window to display   ast Hist Pulse Width APU Eve
199. paacseasbineaselesipadeuncseeee 7 13  8 17  Calculation polarity            ccccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneneees 7 14  8 17  CaliblallOnsc cc5acc ised eee aed ase 13 4  COMPLESS SION ec a E tree 12 8  connecting the power scacssccceiesdonsssochceeiswenininaccsieee as menes 3 5  SOI aaa connotation anes acest cope a 11 21    IM 704310 01E    D   D  ta COMPFESSIOM serr a r A ERR 12 8  Data SIZE rnea E 11 11  11 15  11 17  DOTY DS aian E ERI 7 6  dala Typa err ined cae cosas N eE 11 14  CATS A E E AT E EEEE E EE 3 10  NEE EAA EE SE EE EE E 11 18  11 20  direcion a E 11 11  11 25  E   E E EE E T E E EE T ETEA TT 8 14  EFM A Nett ateam teeta leat Reinet tate h 8 14  ESG KEY aicun e oa usando ae seustes 4 4  ENOr LOGGING sieisen a 1 26  14 4  Eror MeSSagES ei i te pamuea iaueauoante 14 2  Estimated T siria a a ie ite dam 1 24  8 14  Event gale erie eee N E bee E 1 8  ExXtemal Cal a tssextweduic cot aeetahariwaddunes ats aretuencwer 1 8  EXIENSION enaA 11 11  11 14  11 17  external arming input terminals                 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 9  external gate input terminals                  ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 6 2  exiracted dala serii wi eaeurmnens 9 5  PXIFACTION ear occonntadeeaeacan ngpnchaneaauaanas ma manateneanaetanes 9 5  a   PUG aide E E E E IEE eamcatetus 11 11  11 20  FIOPDY DISKS esinsin ien ieii ea ETEN EREN 11 1  Frequency distribution               cccceeeeseeceeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeees 1 18  FROME Panel  ssesicssdennn Aena 2 1  TOUR ATE I EEE
200. ph  Graph Parameter    The following items can be set    e Grid   Turn ON OFF the grid    e Connect   Set whether to linearly interpolate between data points   e Dot Type  Set the dot to  Pixel  or  Mark      Connect OFF Connect ON    EN ENN    Specifying the block number  The block number can only be specified during block sampling when the statistical  calculation area is set to  Block   The statistics of the specified block are displayed     Dot Type Pixel Dot Type Mark    Panorana    c P Poga  IZU                  r 1  1    1    I         LineVar Jat ion  Area  Block 3    T  Average 3   6550ns   T Maximum  37 275ns   T Minimun 36 850ns   ar   T Peak Peak  4Zops Displays the statistics of the   T  d Average   0 2400707 specified block  T RF 1 403100          s 1  i P 1     BLOCK 51    A I    z     30U5  Xz  49 9us AX  25 4us T Num  100  Ui  37 650ns U2  37  e50ns dU    900ns  Y1  34 560ns Yz  39 500ns AY  5 000ns  Display    a Iten re Py ra wBlock Nu  TimevVar   Style  GraphParan   Calc Stat 3       Specify the block to display the  statistics       IM 704310 01E       7 4 Displaying the Statistics     For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1    Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying the statistics  2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     YOKOGAWA 1998 61 02 15 57 66  TineStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 10000 Interval   us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   ChA  1 606 Chi  1 660          Statistics Ya
201. pical value     Output impedance   50Q  Typical value     Output coupling   AC   Output level   1 Vp p or greater  except this level applies to the case when the  input impedance of the receiving side is 50 Q      Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed        CAUTION    Do not apply an external voltage to the reference output terminal  It can damage  the instrument        Selecting the reference   Select from the following choices    Int   Operate using the internal reference clock signal   Ext  Operate using the external reference clock signal     IM 704310 01E    Chapter 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results in the Time Stamp Mode    7 1 Displaying the Histogram   For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1    Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying a histogram  2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     YOROGAWA 1990 01 02 15 47 22  TinmeStamp Timelnterval ATBL Event 16006 Interval   us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  1 000 Chi  1 606       Histogram    Area  Window Calc AtTBL  Average 5 78800ns  Maximum 25  900m  Minimum    16 760ns   Peak   Peak 36   6660s  dg    4 49450ns    ks TS   xi  22  J  ns     ans vie 66  sai  10000    Fg  sop Pf      Es   PL JL JL JL ILI Ld    3  Press the  Histogram  soft key              esc  MMT JE IL JL IE IL     Set the display size of the histogram  4  Press the  Style  soft key to display the Display Style menu  
202. properties of the file  that is selected in the list     11 9    Jd  amp  0  BuljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hulnes 2    11 6 Saving and Loading Setup Information    11 10    Loading setup information  Displaying the Load menu  4  After step 3  press the  Load  soft key to display the File List             File Ite  i O A e ee  lesc   JL JL AL LLL    Selecting the directory from which to load the information   5  Turn the rotary knob to select the medium  displayed with     and press the  SELECT key  Similarly  select the directory  displayed with  lt  gt    The  Path         displays the selected medium directory name     File List    Path   FDO  Space 1334784 byte  i E             T 2us           indow  114 42500ns    1998 10 28 09 32 RU 143  900ns  M 99  906ns  44  9 0ns  4 39825ns   I   l                x1  95  006ns 42  133 060ns AX  3B    ns    aoon    Specifying the file to list  6  Press the  Filter  soft key to select  Item  or  All            Selecting the file to load  7  Turn the rotary knob to select the file to load     Loading the file   8  Pressing the  Load Exec  key loads the setup information from the selected file  the   Save Exec  key changes to an  Abort  key   Pressing the  Abort  soft key cancels  the loading operation     File List    Path   FDONTAS2O  Space 1295872 byte  File Nane                 FIO J indow   sch J 114 42500ns  i  gt    1998 10 28 69 32 RU 143 900ns  TAGGO    SET 5360 1998 10 28 09 35 R U 99  900ns  44  600ns  1  39825ns             
203. r external protective grounding wire or disconnect the  wiring of the protective grounding terminal  Doing so poses a potential shock  hazard    Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse   Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or the fuse might be  defective  Also  make sure to check them before operation    Fuse   To avoid fire  only use a fuse that has a rating  voltage  current  and type  that is  specified by the instrument  When replacing a fuse  turn OFF the power switch  and unplug the power cord  Never short the fuse holder    Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere   Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors   Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety  hazard    Do Not Remove Covers   Some areas inside the instrument have high voltages  Do not remove the cover if  the power supply is connected  The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA   s  qualified personnel only    External Connection   Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under  measurement or control unit     vi       Structure of the Manual    This User   s Manual consists of the following 15 chapters and an index     Chapter1 Functions   Describes the measurement principles and functions of the instrument  Operating   procedures are not given in this chapter  However  reading this chapter will help you   understand the operating procedures given in the chapters that follow    Chapter 2 Names a
204. r value    of the X axis    TT      133 000  AX  38  006ns  1764       11  Soft key menu      Setup information    Displays the conditions for measuring the data  sampling mode  measurement  function  etc         Comments    Displays the comment that is added to the screen image data when they are printed  such as on the internal printer       Date and time  See section 3 7       System icon    Displayed when there is a message or when the system is abnormal       Displayed when there is a error message or a warning message  see  section 14 3    XI   Displayed when the lithium battery is dead or the system is abnormal   Perform the self test when this icon is displayed  see section 14 4        Busy icon    Displayed during the following operations      Blinks while accessing a medium      Blinks while printing to the internal printer   Ly   Blinks while processing data     SCSI    iam   Blinks while detecting SCSI devices       Panorama display  see sections 7 5 and 8 4       Statistics display    The statistics can be displayed with the histogram or the time variation display       X axis width  X Span     You can set the window range to display     2 3    S    d JO S  SN pue soweN      2 3 Screen Display    2 4    9  Read out value  Displays the read out values of the X1 and X2 markers     10 Center value of the X axis  You can set the center value of the X axis of the histogram display     11 Soft key menu  Corresponds to the soft key on the front panel     12 Y axis maxim
205. rent numbers    e Assign numbers that are different from the ID number of the instrument  default value  6  for the internal hard disk and the external SCSI devices    e When changing the SCSI ID number  make sure to press the  SCSI Init  soft key    e The ID numbers of the external SCSI devices are automatically identified     IM 704310 01E       11 5 Formatting the Disk    Procedure    IM 704310 01E    Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE  key to display the File menu   Press the  Utility  soft key        a eee  File Ite ra re ry   Setup Load Save Utility  fT JE JE JL JL J LJ E    3  Press the  Function  soft key to display the Function menu     Fornat  Lj   Function ja re     Fornat edia Info Fornat  es es es es es          es   POL JL IL JL IL JL    4     Press the  Format  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to highlight the medium you wish to format     1995712708 26 17 29    Hardware Hist Period At Event 16666 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming  Ch  6 666  ChE  6 006          Histoqran 3T   File List  File Nane Size Space    1457664    16572606600 1657266660 Use the rotary knob    211456000 211456000 to select the medium  211456600 211456600 i   211456000 211456000   211456000 211456000  211456600 211456000  2146009088 2145746944                   Function 46  600ns    Delete Copy Renane Make Dir   Format               Esc  JL JL JL JOLIE    Selecting the FD format  for floppy disks only     5   6     Press the  FD Format  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to sele
206. rity   e For time interval measurements  when the slope setting is either AtBf  OorAtB     e For pulse width measurements  when the polarity setting is        Setting the Constant T   Set the constant T used when calculating the statistical values jitter and MELE  This  value corresponds to the read out clock when the measured device is an optical disk or  optical disk drive    You cannot change the value of T when using the auto window function since it is  automatically set     Statistical calculation parameters   Statistics can be calculated based on the measured values  during time stamp mode  or  histogram  during hardware histogram mode   The results of the statistical calculation  can be displayed on the histogram  statistic  and time variation displays  see section  1 7     The equations used to calculate some of the statistics vary depending on the sampling  mode  In addition  in the time stamp mode  you can select to calculate the statistics on  the time variation or on the histogram     During the time stamp mode   The following differences exist between the time variation display and the histogram   display    Time variation  You can set the area over which to calculate the statistics with the time  stamp and measured value    Histogram    You can set the area over which to calculate the statistics with the  measured value  bin  and frequency of occurrence     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    1 6 Analysis and Calculation    In the following equations  n is the nu
207. s All  Windo CalceStat      JIL  B L IL    Lo    e When  Window  is selected  5  Turn the rotary knob to select the number of the window for which to calculate the  Statistics  WindowNum      ed   a Item Style  a ABW indowNu   Statistics Al1 Window CalceStat 3T  LIC  E L O ee                     IM 704310 01E 8 5          m     D     5       r   gt   D     D  D  m            Q  Rime  O            D  emp  D  Q  JJ  D  on        T  5     3  D  L  D     Q     D         T  m     O         9   3         Q  D    8 3 Displaying the Statistics    Explanation    8 6    Setting the display format  Style    When using the multi window or auto window function  you can select the display format   of the statistical calculations from the following choices    e All   Lists the statistics of all windows  Only four statistical parameters can be  displayed at once  but you can scroll through the parameters using the  rotary knob    Displays only the parameters that are checked in the dialog box that  appears when the  Calc Stat  soft key is pressed    e Window  Displays the statistics for each window  All statistical parameters are  displayed at once  You can select the following windows    e Window specified in the Window Parameter Setting menu  3T  4T  etc    e Summation  The sum of all windows  The statistics that are displayed  are Peak Peak  o  and o T   e All  Displays        for all parameters   When the format is All    Statistics ValueCHistogram  Area  Marker  Average Peak Peak i Nunb
208. s the  WindowNun  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to select the window for which you wish to display the list     Display  a Item fe Number WH indounu  List   Top     Botton     Center   1203 3T    Esci II a A N OO l         pom Wesbo sipy 3IeMmpIeH 34  u  S nNs  y penje s panseanw oy  HuiAesdsig       8 2 Displaying the List    Explanation  Displaying the list  Displays twenty data points at atime  Taking the left most data in the window to be  number one  the measured values and frequencies are displayed   The list is displayed on the left side of the screen and the histogram is displayed  vertically on the right side   The dotted line and  lt  mark on the histogram display indicate the data that are  highlighted on the list     Setting the data to list   You can set the data to be displayed    The following methods are available to select the data    e Specify the data number and display   e Display the top data  top of the list   the bottom data  bottom of the list   or the center  data  center of the list     Selecting the window to display   You can select the window only when using the multi window or auto window function   Displays the list and histogram of the selected window  The following windows can be  selected    e Window specified in the Window Parameter Setting menu   3T  4T  etc        All Allwindows    e Summation  Displays only the histogram     Note  When displaying the list  the  Window  soft key of the DISPLAY key is not displayed even  when using the mu
209. s the class value  The samples in this class are all considered to  correspond to 510 ns  if the value is read out with the marker  the class value is read  out     As shown in the diagram below  each value on the X axis of the instrument represents a  class value or a displacement  The histogram is created by accumulating the number of  samples that fall in each class     Y axis Scale  Log scale for this example        Histogran    Y axis max     Cles  gt   value  Y High             One bar is called a    bin        X axis span   X Span                ns L      l   Class  X axis center value    Right most value  Left most value g     Class value at the center  on the X axis    on the X axis X Center   Displacement in the   Displacement in the positive direction from  negative direction from X center  X center     Items that can be displayed  Besides the histogram  you can select whether or not to display the marker read out  values  the statistics  and a panorama window     Panorana       Panorama window    i    Area  Window Calc  eU  Average 499  5656ns  Max imum 499  966ns  Minimum 499  z0msz    Pak mok ee a Displays statistics    d Average 6 021813  O T   272431      r  ME 499 9  f Ss  X1  492  475ns  gt  507  475ns AX  15 660ns    U1  o uz  o Nun  500 Displays readout values       Histograms displayed with overlap  set to OFF and at half size    IM 704310 01E    1 7 Displaying the Measured Calculated Results    List Display  See 7 2 and 8 2 for the operating procedures  
210. s the histogram of the slope polarity that is selected with the  Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity item  displayed in orange  and the  histogram of both slopes polarities  displayed in blue     OFF   Displays the histogram of the slope polarity that is selected with the Calculation  Slope Calculation Polarity item  displayed in orange  and the histogram of both  slopes polarities  displayed in blue  in separate windows    The following combinations of slopes and polarities can be selected    e Time interval measurement  ATB1t A Bt A B1   A B  A B  A B     e Pulse width measurement   fol    F e  koko    For the procedures related to setting the Calculation Slope Calculation Polarity item in  the Calculation Statistics Setting menu  see section 7 6     7 2 IM 704310 01E       7 2 Displaying the List   For a functional description  see 1 7      Procedure  1  Press the DISPLAY key to display the Display menu     Displaying the list  2  Press the  Item  soft key to display the Display Item menu     YOKOGAWA 1998 61 02 15 52 49  TimeStamp TimeInterval ATBL Event 16000 Interval   us  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Cha  1 000V ChB  1 600        25ns    TimeStamp Measure Data    141 0 us  95 125 ns  141 2 us 15 250 ns          Marks the position  corresponding to  the number that is  highlighted in the  list                    6 275 NS  Displa    play   e Number  811       3   Pressthe  List  softkey                      Display Item      Histogram   List    Tinevar  S
211. sassseeesansaeenseessaesseeseaeee vi   Conventions Used in this Manual 0 00000    cccccecsseseeseessanesteseeseessanssteseesearesneseenes vii  Chapter 1 Functions   1 1 System Configuration and Block Diagram             ccccecccececseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeeeeessaaeeeees 1 1   t2 Meas  utement Principle A ckect tee ee ee kt eee tele eke a eset 1 3   Ds SIMPE OCC ates bo Socata E E E A eects  1 4   1 4 Measurement Functions  Measurement Items                ccccccsseeeececeeeeeeceeeeeeesaeseeeeseaeeeeaeaneeessaaes 1 5   Period  Time  Interval  Pulse Width eieiaeo a eet aati Ea 1 5   1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal Being Measured                cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaneees 1 6   Measurement BICK  rssnni ote ciratinsch wtiet act baste eacen auction nic S tee taciaien art ceed aes 1 6   BOCK SAMPING ate hares vo Seine eae wh Aa a eins ea tae aca cdi E Are abaevasieen eae  1 7   Gate  Samping MtSnVal  serssx sac ceverg cance a cont vase a vacevaxsaqnavadege cated ac E aia a ES 1 8   Arming Arming Delay  spiitscscsisstitaessddvcasdeasach eE aaa a danse ene ae eran OAA 1 9   AVON 28S ease et eed Bee eh eon Ne catego d lado ed eae eats al tes cdade leit sad a sesame A 1 10   Input  Coupling  Input Impedant eS errs a E E ER ileal ado Mendon es 1 11   Trigger Mode Trigger Level  Reference Signal I O  0        cccccceceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeaaaaaaaaeseeeeeeeeeaeaeaaes 1 12   te   Analysisand Calculation aiccis einteicirct ea ctiiceta
212. se arm  MAN FEE    12 2    E    Turn the feed knob       While pressing the lock release lever  towards  OPEN   pull up on the handle on  the left side of the printer cover to open it     Move the release arm located near the  right front to the  MAN FEED  position   Hold the roll of paper so that the inside of  the paper  not the glossy side  is facing  up  While pressing the movable holder on  the left side of the roll storage space to the  left  set the core in the right holder  Then   release the movable holder     Insert the tip of the roll paper in the space  between the roller and the black guide and  turn the feed knob away from you until 10  cm of the roll paper is showing at the top  of the roller     IM 704310 01E    IM 704310 01E    12 1 Attaching the Paper Roll for Printing    Move the release arm to the  Free   position and straighten the roll paper   Then  move the release arm to the  HOLD   position    If the release arm is not in the  HOLD   position  an error message will be  displayed at the time of printing  In this  case  you will not be able to print     Move the printer cover from the back to  the front and close the cover  Make sure  that the tip of the roll sheet is showing  from the opening in the printer cover   When closing the printer cover  press the  cover firmly until it clicks        Note  After the paper roll is installed  follow the steps on the next page to check that the paper is  feeding properly  If it is not feeding evenly  continue to 
213. seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeas 11 12  Saving the Statistical Calculation Results 00    ceecceccecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaas 11 16  DGIOUNGIPNCS  Misctect estes ee nds elie oie as Be eater Sadia e re agli Sir  elie 11 18  Copying  Fles 3346 tech eters sett heh aed ecole ie eek ue i ae ce alesse 11 21  Changing the File Name and Creating Directories              ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeaas 11 24  Connecting the InstruMent to a PO eressero a a a E 11 26    Outputting Screen Images    Attaching the Paper Roll for Printing               c ccccccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeesaaaeeees 12 1  FMM NO EPEE EEEE tse ae sacuatens A E TE sate AET TAEAE A E A E T cs te aeceen ETAT 12 4  Saving Screen Images to Floppy Disk  Internal Hard Disk  Option     and ExtemalSCSlhiDEVC E a E A T Ne 12 6    Using Other Functions    iMit  lizing  the Setup IN OrmatioN eiseressen densuensionadd suslesusdenescplhenselansxaxssesseaiates 13 1  Calibrating he  Ms trumeNbs einne eisinuneinardeaxestsdsavnceececsesnel Ga dleadous 13 4  O  tp  tting Monitor Signals esses E E E EE E 13 5  Checking the Setup Conditions of the Instrument and the ROM Version              ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 6  Turning ON OFF the Click Sound  Beep Sound  and Warning Display  Setting the Brightness of   Hae CD MONO hase ia eee E eee ere ead 13 7    Troubleshooting and Maintenance    TFROUBISS IO OUING  tee esas cclct E E E EEEE 14 1  MOSSIGE Sa ee eee epee rene 
214. selected vary depending on the extraction mode    The data around or between triggers can be extracted  but the data that can be extracted  vary depending on the extraction mode     Mode Trigger Target Description    Singe    gt   Prev   Next  Both  Extract the data immediately before or   gt  Prev C Next O BothO after the trigger or both   Combination O  _   swPrrev   Next O Extract the data immediately before or   o  Prev ONext   after the trigger   Between O O   Extract the data between two spaces        Extract the data between two marks    C_D indicates a space       indicates a mark  On this instrument  you can select  which window will be marks and which will be spaces     Statistical parameters that are listed   The statistics of all marks  Spaces  and extracted data and the number of samples are  listed    Select the parameters to list in the following dialog box              O  J Calculation Statistics Setting I        Displays the first two  parameters that were  checked               e Awerage  fo  Peak   Peak                        a  tem a  ra  Histogram Style CalcrStat    Note during inter symbol interference analysis   The color assignments on the histogram display are as follows    Histogram of the extracted data   Orange   Histogram of all spaces or marks   Blue   By turning OFF the  Overlap  function in the  Style  setting of the DISPLAY key  the  histogram of the extracted data and that of all spaces or marks can be displayed  separately      uondo  uonoun
215. ss the SCALE key to display the Scale menu    e Setting the center value of the X axis   2  Press the  X Center  soft key to set the rotary knob action to  X Center    Use the rotary knob or numerical keys to set the center value     Selecting the X axis span  Press the  X Span  soft key to set the rotary knob action to  X Span    Turn the rotary knob to select the value     oo    Selecting the maximum value of the Y axis  Press the  Y High  soft key to set the rotary knob action to  Y High    Turn the rotary knob to select the value     P    Selecting the scale type of Y axis  Press the  Y Axis  soft key to select  Lin  or  Log      O1    YOKOGAWA 1998 16 22 69 41 58  Hardware Hist Pulse Width Am Event 1606006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch    1 66060 ChB  6 600    Area  Window  Average 114  42660ns  Maximum 144  00m  Minimum 99  900nz   Peak Peak 44  100nz  0 3 40225ns       Wh bl     mn       Jons    114 666ns ooo  X1  95 000ns xZ  133 000ns AX  38 006ns   0 Wz     Num  31764       Scale    Yi WU   fax Center Jo  X span Io  Y High   Y Axis Ja Du indounu   114  000ns   ns 1e4 Lin Fanorana 3T  ee ee ee ee eee       IM 704310 01E    Explanation    IM 704310 01E    8 8 Changing the Scale Value    The instrument provides both auto scaling and manual scaling functions     Auto scaling    Sets the X  and Y axes automatically according to the measured data  This can only be    used during the single window mode     Manual scaling  You can arbitrarily se
216. styles are available for   displaying the statistics    e All   Display the statistics of all windows that were defined in the multi window  setting menu  example  3T to 14T     e Window  Display the statistics of the window that was defined in the  Window  Parameter Setting  menu or the  Summation  window     When Window is selected while When ALL is selected while using the  using the multi window function or multi window function  when using single window    Statistical parameter  Statistical calculation area           Statistical parameter  Statistical calculation area                     Statistics  dlueCcHistogram  orea  Window Statistics Value Histogyam  Area  Marker  E ALUE H H           S     Window Average Maximum Minimum  Average 114  42660nsec tatistics 3T 114  42600ns 144  600ns 99  9060ns          Max imun    144  666nsec  99  966nsec  44  106nsec    3 40225nsec  SEE           Minimum  FPeak Peak        4T 157  36256ns 182  666ns 122  666ns  a  6T 229 81670  256   000NE 198  666ns  sr  8T 3903 897503 334  600ns 2e4 300ns  i   TOT  11T 462  6956ns 416  166ns 393   206ns    Statistics                                  Panorama Display  See 7 5 and 8 4 for the operating procedures     1 22    During the histogram display  only for the hardware histogram mode  or the time  variation displayed  the measured data can be displayed in the upper section of the  window  referred to as the panorama display   In addition  a section of the data that is  displayed in the panor
217. sumption    1 5 kV AC for one minute   between power supply and case     Withstand voltage    Insulation resistance    10 MQ or more at 500 V DC     between power supply and case   All input output connectors must be grounded to the case  Approx  213  W x266  H x350  D  mm  excluding projections    Signal ground  External dimensions  Weight    Approx  10 kg  main unit only     Cooling method    Forced air cooling    Horizontal  no stacking of instruments     Installation position    Setup and clock information are backed up by internal lithium batteries     Battery backup  Fuse      Standard accessories    Location Maximum Rated Voltage Maximum Rated Current Type  Inlet 250 V 3A Time lag  CPU board 250 V 800 mA Time lag    Standard   UL  CSA certified  VDE SEMKO  certified    e Power cord 1 piece    e Rubber feet  2 pieces  e 1 roll of printer paper  e Users Manual 1 piece  this manual     e GP IB Interface User   s Manual 1 piece    Safety standard      Emission      EN61010 1  Overvoltage Category  Installation Category    Pollution degree 2 4    Complying standard   rs    EN55011 Group1 Class A  This is a Class A product for industrial environment   In a domestic  environment this product may cause radio interference in which case  the user may be required to take adequate measures     15 10    Complying standard    IM 704310 01E    Item    15 16 General Specifications    Specification    Immunity   Complying standard EN61326 1 1995          2    3     4    IM 704310 01E  
218. sures the positive side  from a rising edge to the next falling edge       Measures the negative side  from a falling edge to the next rising edge       Measures the positive and negative sides alternately  In addition the measured  datacorrespondingto  4  Jor    l  andlHe can be separated for the purpose  of displaying histograms  For details see sections 7 1 and 8 1     Example of separating the data and displaying the histogram  Select either one    1998 16 29 69 14 24  Interval   6us    YORKOGAWA  Timestamp  Inhibit Off    Pulse Width Aare  Ref  Clock Int     Event 16666  Auto Arming       Calculationsstatistifts setting    ChA  1 660 Chi  1 606          Histogran e       Calculation Area    Calculation Polarity    Displays  le        T Value    statistics       Average a Maximum  a Peak   Peak d  o  E L Error     0  Mode       a Item  distogran   Style eee    5 6    37  6G0nS       Area  Marker Calc  e       fo  Minimum Polarity  me  fo  d Average     c  MELE    All Clear    Displays    l    only             sHens z i   e E D  ans i i  500NE  X1  16 150ns XZ  610 156ns AX  600 000ns  U1  6 Display style           Graph Fart  er LM Pr OW a   a Item  Half DFF DFF  Histogran       Note  If you change the sampling mode or the measurement function  the data acquired up to that  point can no longer be displayed or analyzed  Acquire the data again  or load the data from a  file     IM 704310 01E    Chapter 6 Setting the Acquisition Conditions of the Measurement Input Signal    
219. t 2 4 us   Approx  408 KB  1185 KB   2 4 us lt P P   Approx  544 KB  1580 KB    e Data measured in the time stamp mode  Approx  8xS  5 KB    Ascii  The data size varies greatly depending on the sampling mode  sampling size  and  histogram settings  The maximum size is approximately 15 MB     Properties  Lists the file size  the date it was saved  the attribute  and the comment     Note  e You cannot save or load while the measurement is in progress  START STOP indicator is  ON    e The measured data saved in ASCII  text  format cannot be re loaded   e When measurement data are loaded  the setup information of the instrument changes to the  setup information included with the measured data   e If you change the file extension on a PC  for a example  you will not be able to load that file        CAUTION    Removing the medium while the access indicator and  2  are blinking can damage  the magnetic head of the drive and destroy the data on the medium        11 15    Jd  amp  0  BuljoouU0y pue geq Hulpeo7 pue Hbulaes 2       11 8 Saving the Statistical Calculation Results    Procedure  1  Press the SHIFT UTILITY FILE  key to display the File menu   2  Press the  File Item  soft key to display the File Item menu           File Ite ry ra  Btatistics Save Utility  es  Jt JL JE JE JE JL 4    3  Press the  Statistics  soft key     ne a  Esc   C JEL LE EE Ld       File Item             Selecting the data type  during time stamp mode only   4  Press the  Stat Item  soft key to select  H
220. t edge  of the input signal of channel B  For the various combinations of slopes  see section 5 3     Setting the Time Interval Measurement        Example  Both channels A and B  rise  Example  Channel A  both rise and fall  channel B  rise   A  B f   AtB f    Measured Measured Measured Measured Measured       Pulse Width  See 5 4 for the operating procedures   Measures the time of the positive side  between the rising edge and falling edge  or the  negative side  between the falling edge and the rising edge  of the input signal  For the  various patterns of polarities  see section 5 4    Setting the Pulse Width Measurement      Channel A or B can be selected for the measurement     Example  positive  rising to falling      L Measured Measured   Measured   Measured  1  lt   gt  i  lt   gt  Mgt  lt  lt  So    CH A  i       t        CHB    IM 704310 01E 1 5    ee         1 5 Acquisition Conditions for the Input Signal  Being Measured    Measurement Block    The TA520 repeats the process of making measurements  processing data  and  displaying the result  The    measurement block    refers to the smallest unit of  measurement that is handled in one cycle of the process  If the number of samples   number of data points  acquired in one cycle of the process is N  then    one  measurement block    refers to measuring  processing  and displaying N samples of data   As shown in the examples below  each sample  S1  S2  S3  to SN  in the measurement  block is measured for the correspon
221. t key to display the Display Item menu     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 22 09 08 54  Hardware Hist TimelInterval ATBL Event 100000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   ChA  1 000UV ChB  1 000V        2 450 ns 1   2 425 ns    L883    2 400 NS        2 375 ns   2 350 ns     2 325 ns  o zio    J  889  2 250 ns      a zi    r  881  882  883 F  Z 5   Z y   886  St  a  220m   B   892  894 o  895 o az   896 o a   838     r  99       Marks the position  corresponding to  the number that is  highlighted in the  list            891       _ 832      _ 893    84   z  iz5 ms  es   210 ns     89   2 075 ms  ar  2 050 ns       898  2 025 ns    2 00m 20   900    1 975 ns  Displa    9   12   13   17   14   12   24   18   11   13    2 175 ns 24  za  26   22   22   26   12   26   23          Esc   IL IL IL IL I LE Ld    3   Pressthe  List  softkey                 Esc    E JTL JLILIJIL I    Setting the data to be displayed   4   Usethe rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the number of the desired data   The specified data is highlighted and the position of the specified number is  marked on the time variation display     Displaying the top data  4  Press the Top  softkey  The top data  first data  are highlighted     Displaying the bottom data  4  Press the  Bottom  soft key  The bottom data  last data  are highlighted     Displaying the center data  4  Press the  Center  soft key  The center data are highlighted     Selecting the window to display  only during multi window   4  Pres
222. t names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  holders     1st Edition  April 1999  2nd Edition  November 1999    All Rights Reserved  Copyright    1999 Yokogawa Electric Corporation    IM 704310 01E       Checking the Contents of the Package    Main Unit    Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument  If some of the  contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage  contact the dealer  from which you purchased them     Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate match those on the  order     YOKOGAWA   Made in Japan       MODEL  Type Name     704310  SUFFIX  Suffix code   Suffix Code Description  Power voltage  1 100 120 VAC   5 200 240 VAC  Power cord  D UL CSA Standards Power Cord  Part No   A1006WD    Maximum Rated Voltage  125 V  Maximum Rated Current   7 A    F VDE Standard Power Cord  Part No   A1009WD    Maximum Rated Voltage  250 V  Maximum Rated Current   10 A    Q BS Standard Power Cord  Part No   A1054WD    Maximum Rated Voltage  250 V  Maximum Rated Current   10 A    R SAA Standard Power Cord  Part No   A1024WD    Maximum Rated Voltage  240 V  Maximum Rated Current   10 A   Optional specifications  C8 Internal hard disk   SCSI   F1 Inter symbolic interference analysis function    NO   Instrument No    When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument  please quote the  instrument No     Note      We recommend you keep the packing box  The box is useful when yo
223. t the X  and Y axis settings     e Setting the X  and Y axis  Range of center values of the X axis    Selections for the X axis span    Selections for the maximum value of the Y axis      Selections for the scale type of the Y axis    Note         50 000ns to 3 200000000 us  in 25    ps steps       Select from 1 5 3 7 5 15 30 60 150     300 600 ns  1 5 3 6 us  10 20 40 100 200 400 1000 2000   4000 10000 20000 40000 1 00000   200000 400000 1 e6 1 e7 1e8   1e9 Lin   1e1 1e2 1e3 1e4 1e5 1e6 1e7 1e8   1e9 Log       Select Lin  linear scale  or Log     logarithmic scale     You cannot auto scale when using the multi window or auto window function     8 19      pom Weibo siH BeMpPJeH 34  UI S  NS9Y psa ej nojeDg painsesjy oy  HuiAesdsig          8 9 Reading the Data     For a functional description  see 1 6      Procedure  Turning ON OFF the marker  1  Press the MARKER key to display the Marker menu   2  Press the  Marker  soft key to select  ON  or  OFF      Moving the X marker   3  Press the  X Marker  soft key to select  X1  or  X2    Turn the rotary knob to move the marker   The measured value and frequency at the position of the marker are displayed in  the bottom section of the main window     Moving the X1 and X2 markers simultaneously  4  Press the  X1 amp X2  soft key   Turning the rotary knob causes X1 and X2 markers to move together     Setting the statistical calculation area  when the calculation area is set to Marker   5  Press the  Y Marker  soft key   Use the rotary
224. ta from a  file     IM 704310 01E 5 1    suo  OUN JUSWaINSes y pue spo Huljdwes ay  Hbuijes a       5 2    5 2 Setting the Period Measurement    Procedure    Explanation     For a functional description  see 1 4      1  Press the FUNCTION key to display the Function menu     2  Press the  Function  soft key     EVENT SIZE 16666000666 1996 16 22 66 54 32  Hardware Hist Period At Event 160666006 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   Ch  6 660 Chi  6 606       Histogram    Area  Window  Average 99 9625675ns  Maximum 100   350m3  Minimum 99  600ns  Peak Peak 750ps        77 5900p3     z ons 393 9 Ms     X1  92 473 XZ  107 473 AX  15 0  0nzec   Wi    Yz    Nun  100000000  Function       Esc E IL IL JE JE IL IL    Selecting period measurement  3  Press the  Period  soft key     Function    a  Period   TI Pulse Widt    es   POL IL IL IE JEL IL    Selecting the channel to be measured  4  Press the  Channel  soft key and select  ChA  or  ChB               Selecting the slope  5   Pressthe  Slope  soft key andselect  T or  J      Function  Function   Channel Slope  Period ChE ft  l    E E O IL IL       Measurement range   The measurement range varies depending on the sampling mode   e For time stamp mode   8 ns to 20 ms   e For hardware histogram mode   8nsto3 2us    Selecting the channel to be measured  Select either CHA or CHB     Selecting the slope   Select from the following choices    e T  Measures from a rising edge to the next rising edge of the input signal  
225. tatistics B Humber o o  811    a  n PEI LILI LJ LE    Setting the data to be displayed   4   Usethe rotary knob or the numerical keys to set the number of the desired data   The specified data is highlighted and the position of the specified number is  marked on the time variation display     Displaying the top data  4  Press the Top  softkey  The top data  first data  are highlighted     Displaying the bottom data  4  Press the  Bottom  soft key  The bottom data  last data  are highlighted   Display    e   oo a    JOUR L IL IL 4    Specifying the block number  only for block sampling   4  Press the  Block Num  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the block number that you wish to list     Display  a kca     roen   fe a aBlock Nui     JL JL_J L_JL_ JL  oe                IM 704310 01E 7 3    QpoW Adwe1s sw  oy  ul S  NSaY pezyejnojeD peinsesayy ay  HulAeldsig x    7 2 Displaying the List    Explanation  Displaying the list  Displays twenty data points ata time  Taking the first measurement data to be number  one  the time stamps and measured data are displayed   The list is displayed on the left side of the screen and the time variation is displayed  vertically on the right side   The dotted line and  lt d mark on the time variation screen indicate the data that are  highlighted on the list     Setting the data to list   You can set the data to be displayed    The following methods are available to select the data    e Specify the data number and display   e Display top data
226. the input section           Note  If you are using the probe for the first time  perform phase correction according to    3 6  Calibrating the Probe  Performing Phase Correction      If the probe is not calibrated  the gain  will not be constant across different frequencies and proper measurements cannot be made   Perform phase correction for each channel     IM 704310 01E 3 7    sjusWainseeyy Bunes a10jog o    3 8       3 6 Calibrating the Probe  Performing Phase  Correction     Equipment Required    Prepare the following equipment  Calibration signal    Frequency   1 kHz   Voltage  amplitude    1 Vp p   Waveform type   Square wave   Output impedance   1 MQ   Recommended signal   CAL signal of YOKOGAWA DL1500 Series Digital  Oscilloscope    Waveform monitor   Frequency characteristics   DC to 200 MHz     3 dB attenuation point    Input coupling   DC   Input impedance   Connect a 50    terminator to the input terminal of the  waveform monitor    Recommended device   YOKOGAWA DL1500 Series Digital Oscilloscope  50 Q  terminator  YOKOGAWA 700976     The following section describes the connection and operating procedures when the  recommended signal and device are used     Connecting Devices    A       CAUTION    e Do not apply a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the input  terminals  It can damage the input section    e Do not apply external voltage to the CAL signal output terminal of the DL1500  Series or to the monitor output terminal of this instrument  It can 
227. tion  memory  The acquired data are read by the CPU via the memory controller  at which  point the data are used in statistical calculations or displayed on the LCD    Either the signal from the internal crystal oscillator  compensated against temperature  drift  or an external reference signal  signal from the REFERENCE IN terminal  can be  used as the reference signal  In either case  the signal is passed through a 10 MHz  band pass filter and output as a reference clock output  The measurement clock uses  the frequency multiples of this reference clock     IM 704310 01E       1 2 Measurement Principle    Measurement Principle  Time shorter than the period of the reference clock is called fractional time  In general   since the signal being measured and the measurement clock are not synchronized   fractional time exists at both the beginning and the end of measurements  This  instrument generates a    fractional pulse    which is a pulse signal amounting to the sum of  the fractional time and one cycle of the reference clock   If the pulse width of the signal being measured  the period of the measurement clock   and the times of the fractional pulses are taken to be T  to  Ta  and Tp  respectively  T can  be broken into two terms  integer multiple of the measurement clock  N to  and the time  of the fractional pulses  Ta  Tb     T N to  Ta Tp     This instrument converts the time  Ta  Tb  of the fractional pulse that it generated at the  beginning and end of the measurement
228. to display the Save Menu     Pd   aFile Iter Data Type Pa Pa Fa   Measure  Ascii Ein  Load Save Utility       O   ee LJ Ld    6  Press the  File List  soft key to display the File List        Save Menu    File List ee fave Pred  SEEE    7  Select the medium and directory according to the steps given in    Selecting the  directory in which to save the information    in 11 6    8  Press the  File Name  soft key to display the Save menu   Enter the file name according to the steps given in    Setting the file name    in 11 6        IM 704310 01E    11 7 Saving and Loading the Measurement Results    Saving the file   9  After setting the file name  pressing the  Save Exec  key saves the measured data  to the specified directory  the  Save Exec  key changes to an  Abort  key    Pressing the  Abort  soft key cancels the save operation     YOKOGAWA 1998 16 23 09 27 27  Hardware Hist Pulse Width APL Event 160600 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   ChA  1 666 ChB  6 600       Panorana  File List        Path   FDO    Space 1008640      Save       File Name           FD  1  utoNamning           5C     DUD DC61  WUF   File Hame  DVD DC62   WF   DVD DD61  WVF   Comment TOKUGAWA     HH_PER  WUF   39825ns  TS_BLK1  WUF                95  660ns XZ  H ae AX   3B  eoons  e Menu          Esci    HLILILIL  a    Loading the measurement results   Displaying the load menu   5  After step 4  only Bin files can be loaded   press the  Load  soft key to display the  File List     a 
229. u  were setting is not confirmed and it is set back to the value the existed before    You can cancel a value by pressing the RESET key before the value is confirmed   Setting a numerical value using the rotary knob   Only numerical values can be set with the rotary knob  You cannot set the unit with the  rotary knob as you can with the numerical keys    If the value of the digit at the cursor position is increased using the rotary knob  the value  is carried over to the next digit  If the value is decreased  the opposite occurs    Setting the string   For file names and comments  the keyboard that pops up on the screen is used to set    the string   e Keys other than the character keys on the keyboard  DEL    Deletes the character immediately before the cursor   INS   Switches the insert overwrite mode  During the insert mode  the INSERT  indicator on the keyboard lights   CLR   Clears all characters that are displayed     SPACE  Enters one space   ENT   Confirms the string that is displayed   CAPS   Switches the case of the input character   e The number and types of characters that can be used on file names and  comments     Number of characters Allowed characters  File name 1 to 8 characters 0 to 9  Ato Z       minus      _       Comment 0 to 25 characters All characters  includes space     Arrow keys  The operation varies depending on the method used to input the numerical values   e When using the numerical keys  Operates as a backspace key   e When using the rotary kno
230. u need to transport the  instrument     il IM 704310 01E    Standard Accessories  The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument     Part Name Part Number  1  Power cord See page 2  2  Rubber feet A9088ZM  3  Printer roll chart B9850NX  4  User   s Manual IM 704310 01E  5  User   s Manual IM 704310 12E    6  Spare fuse for the power A1436EF    supply    Checking the Contents of the Package    Quantity               Notes    See page 2   A set of two pieces  Thermalsensible paper   Total length  30 m   User Manual  this manual    GP IB Interface User   s Manual  Spare  attach to fuse holder of the  main unit    1  Power cord  one of the following power cords  is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes        UL CSA    standard VDE standard    A1006WD A1009WD    BS standard  A1054WD    SAA standard  A1024WD       Optional Accessories  sold separately   The following optional accessories are sold separately   For information and ordering  contact your dealer     IM 704310 01E    Part Name    BNC cable  BNC cable  Rack mount kit  Rack mount kit  Rack mount kit  Rack mount kit    Part No     366924  366925  751533 E6  751534 E6  751533 J6  751534 J6    Sales Unit    ee ee ee ee ee    Notes    BNC BNC  Length  1 m  BNC BNC  Length  2 m  For EIA single mount  For EIA dual mount   For JIS single mount  For JIS dual mount       Safety Precautions    This instrument is an IEC safety class   instrument  provided with terminal for protective  grounding   
231. um value  You can set this value for the log scale and linear scale     13 Zoom box    The waveform in the zoom box is displayed zoomed in the main window     IM 704310 01E    Chapter 3 Before Starting Measurements    3 1 Precautions on the Use of the instrument    Safety Precautions    IM 704310 01E    If you are using this instrument for the first time  make sure to thoroughly read the     Safety Precautions    given on page 4    Do not remove the cover from the instrument   Some sections inside the instrument have high voltages that are extremely  dangerous  For internal inspection or adjustment  contact your nearest YOKOGAWA  dealer    Never continue to use the instrument if there are any symptoms of trouble such as  strange smells or smoke coming from the instrument  In such cases  immediately turn  OFF the power and unplug the power cord  Then  contact your nearest YOKOGAWA  dealer    If the following error message is displayed  immediately turn OFF the power  The  cooling fan has stopped  From the rear panel  check for and remove any foreign  object that may be obstructing the cooling fan  If the same error message appears  when you turn ON the power switch again  it is probably a malfunction  In this case   contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer     Error  ErrorNo   906  Fan stopped   Turn OFF the power immediately     Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord  The power cord should also be  kept away from any heat sources  When unplugging the power cord from th
232. ument or of the internal hard disk  1    Press the UTILITY key to display the Utility menu   2  Press the  SCSI  soft key to display the SCSI Setting menu     YOKOGAWA 1996 10 23 08 52 43  Hardware Hist Period At Event 100000000 Interval Min  Inhibit Off Ref  Clock Int  Auto Arming   icon  Ch  8 600  Chi  6 000  Histogran    Area  Window  Average 99 962567515  Maximum 100  350ns  Minimum 99 600ns  Peak Peak  750ps  d 77 5900ps       f as 73 97 ms  X1  92 475ns X2  107 473 AX  15 000ns  Yi  6 YZ    Nun  166600006       Utility    i i  k ai  ai   Conf ig Menory selftest  Ealibratio SCSI   Nextl 2    es   Ji ILJILIBLILI       3  Press the  Own ID  or  HD ID  soft key   Turn the rotary knob to set the ID number    4  Press the  SCSI Init  soft key to execute the ID number change   An icon blinks in the upper right corner of the screen while the ID is being changed   The tm ICON disappears when the changes are complete     V1     f SCSI setting     HD ID              ra re re ry 6 5  contig f nenoru  Serrtest Patsoration           Esc    JL JL JL JIL oo       The SCSI ID number is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to  the SCSI chain    Make sure not use duplicate ID numbers on any of the connected devices    The default values are as follows    Own ID  instrument    6   HD ID  internal hard disk    5     Internal hard disk and SCSI are options     Range of SCSI ID numbers  Oto 7    Precautions on setting the SCSI ID number   e Own ID and HD ID must be diffe
233. unction  Option    Describes how to use the inter symbolic interference analysis function    Chapter 10 Storing Recalling Setup Information from the Internal Memory   Describes how to store and recall setup information from the internal memory and how to   change the setup    Chapter 11 Saving and Loading Data and Connecting to a PC   Describes how to save and load data such as setup information and measured    calculated results from the floppy disk  internal hard disk  option   and external SCSI   devices and how to format disks and delete data    Chapter 12 Outputting Screen Images   Describes how to output screen images to the internal printer  the floppy disk  the internal   hard disk  option   and to an external SCSI device    Chapter 13 Using Other Functions   Describes how to initialize the settings  calibrate the instrument  output monitor signals    confirm current conditions  adjust the brightness of the LCD  and other such operations    Chapter 14 Troubleshooting and Maintenance   Describes the possible causes of problems and their appropriate corrective measures    Describes the messages that are displayed on the screen  Describes how to log errors    perform self tests  adjust the time base  carry out performance tests  and replace fuses    Chapter 15 Specifications   Describes the specifications of the instrument    Index   Gives an index     IM 704310 01E       Conventions Used in this Manual    IM 704310 01E    Unit  k Denotes 1000  Example  100kHz  K Denotes
234. utes    Turn the REFERENCE ADJUST on the rear panel of the TA520  and adjust it so that the  read out value of the frequency counter is within the following range    9 999990 MHz to 10 000010 MHz  10 MHz 10 Hz  within  1 ppm     14 9    z soueus UIeWy pue HunooysajqnoIL       14 6 Executing the Performance Test    A       CAUTION    e Do not apply a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the input  terminals  It can damage the input section    e Do not apply an external voltage to the output terminals  It can damage the  internal circuit        Testing the Trigger Voltage Accuracy    14 10    Instruments required  Prepare the following instruments   DC voltage generator    e Voltage accuracy   1 mV or better  e Recommended instrument   Programmable DC voltage current source 7651  by  YOKOGAWA     The procedures for testing the trigger voltage accuracy using the recommended  instruments are provided below     Connecting the instruments   e Check that all the instruments are turned OFF  then connect the instruments    e Connect the output of the DC voltage generator to the input terminal  CHA or CHB  of  the TA520     TA520 DC voltage generator  7651                                                        Instrument settings     TA520   Input settings   DC coupling  1 MQ  trigger level   0 V  e 7651  Output level   4 000 V     2 000 V     OV      2 000 V      4 000 V    Note    If there is noise due to the environment  attach a 1 uF capacitor between the signal cable and
235. y disk before  turning OFF the power     Note  The lithium battery that is used to retain information has a finite life  When the battery  approaches the end of its life  the instrument begins to operate abnormally such as indicating  an incorrect date and time or failing to save or load measured data  If you see these  symptoms  please perform the self test according to    14 4 Performing a Self test     If the    Low  Battery    warning message is displayed  the lithium battery must be replaced immediately   Because the batteries cannot be replaced by the user  contact your nearest YOKOGAWA  dealer     IM 704310 01E       3 5 Connecting Cables and Probes    Location of the Input Terminals  The input terminals are located on the lower section of the front panel  Connect a cable  with a BNC connector or a probe        500 lt 5Vrms  1MQ lt 40Vpk       Input Specifications    Connector type   BNC  Number of channels   2  Input impedance   50 Q 1 MQ  20 pF Typical value      Maximum input voltage  e When the input impedance is 50    5Vrms  e When the input impedance is 1 MQ   e 40 V  DC ACpeak  when DC lt input frequency  lt 100 kHz      3 5 f 5 V DC ACpeak  when 100 kHz lt  input frequency  lt 200 MHz  where f is a  frequency in MHz   Ground   Connect to the case   s ground      Typical values represent typical or average values  They are not strictly guaranteed     A N CAUTION    Do not apply a voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage to the input terminals   It can damage 
236. y sisAjeuy 39u  3193 19 U   OqUIAS 19 U  34  HuIsn o       9 3 Analysis Example    When the trigger is set to Single  Space     Analyze the Mark data immediately before the Space 3T              Mark Space Mark Space Mark Space Mark Space Mark    Trigger Trigger   Trigger    Analyzes the corresponding Mark data         Histo ran al 1 Mark     Histogram display of all  Mark data       AA  s    HistagrantSelcten Mark  singre Coie Tri ig  l 3T Prev                Histogram display of the      on on EN ae i extracted Mark data  Tms gat Wg e    3 1528 112 5400 7  51 181 877 5 a    ses 180 1750   4 0225 253  6 217 1075 316156 5 4 213     8225 4 6025 126    fs 300 0700   4900 246 257  175 4 8560 65                                  91 337 4890 4675    se 336 125 4 525 22  10T 372 250 4 625 369    2868 24  11 410 925 21725 KK 8  ISI espace i   Hark   Mod Polar it Tri co T  t     Ce  pa eer ave Pr    Pree    reve    lt    Sets    the analysis of the  i SS CS CA Mark data immediately  before the Space 3T        Statistics of the extracted Mark data  Statistics of all Mark data    When the trigger is set to Combination  Space Mark     Analyze the Mark date immediately before the Space 3T  and Mark 7T  sequence     Mark Space Mark SpaceMark Space Mark Space Mark  a lt E S  E __  Trigger Trigger         the corresponding Mark  e    Histo rantAl 1 Mark        1990     Ty Histogram display of all  A A a   hi Mark data          irstogran Selctad Mark  Combi  coi  Trig  atin  gt   7T  Prev    
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Electrolux EOD67642 User's Manual  Istruzioni per l`uso Lavastoviglie Manual de instrucciones  Liquid Image Explorer 304 M  J.E. ADAMS INDUSTRIES OWNERS MANUAL MODEL# 29015 thru    TEM-100  C7x00 User Manual-Rev6-French REVISED 2005  エピソード・エイピア Jタイプ  5 - Graco  RESISTENZE ELETTRICHE - Alpha    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file